This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

Networking

Provides a stable and user-friendly network operation environment optimized for various cloud environments of customers.

1 - VPC

1.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Samsung Cloud Platform provides VPC service to support the use of logically isolated customer-dedicated private network spaces in the cloud environment.
VPC (Virtual Private Cloud) is a service that provides logically isolated customer-dedicated private network spaces in the cloud environment. You can create General Subnets for public or private use, and Local Subnets for server-to-server communication according to your purpose. You can freely choose NAT Gateway and Internet Gateway to configure various networks. You can create multiple VPCs and operate them independently. You can configure connections between VPCs through VPC Peering.

Service Architecture

Architecture
Figure. VPC Architecture

Components

Subnet

Subnet refers to the IP address range of a VPC. You can create subnets for public or private use using General Subnets according to your purpose. It is a service that allows users to subdivide networks according to their purpose/scale within a VPC. Subnet provides General Subnet and Local Subnet for server-to-server communication.

  • General Subnet Create/View/Delete: This is the subnet created by default when creating a VPC, and you use the subnet according to your purpose. For example, you can distinguish and use it as a Public Subnet that can access the internet and a Private Subnet that cannot access the internet.

  • VPC Endpoint Subnet Create/View/Delete: You can create an entry point to the VPC that allows access to Samsung Cloud Platform through a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.

  • Local Subnet Create/View/Delete: This is a subnet that allows only direct connections between Virtual Server-Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server-Bare Metal Server without connecting to other subnets or external access. Only Virtual Server-Virtual Server settings within the VPC are possible.

Subnet Types

Sub_network refers to a subdivided IP address area in small units for use in an IP network. Subnet types are divided according to how routing for the subnet is configured.

TypeDescription
Public SubnetCan configure a subnet that can access the internet as a General Subnet
Private SubnetCan configure a subnet that cannot access the internet as a General Subnet
VPC Endpoint SubnetCan configure a subnet that can be used as a VPC Endpoint
Local SubnetCan configure a subnet that cannot connect to other subnets or external access
Table. Subnet Types

Internet Gateway

You can create an Internet Gateway and connect it to a VPC, view detailed information, or delete unused Internet Gateways. You can connect VPC resources to the internet using the Internet Gateway.
You can assign a Public IP to instances and load balancers that can be connected from the outside by connecting to the internet.

NAT Gateway

You can create a NAT Gateway and connect it to a subnet, view detailed information, or delete unused NAT Gateways.
To create a NAT Gateway for a subnet, you must first create an Internet Gateway and connect it to the VPC. When you create a NAT Gateway, internet access is allowed for all resources belonging to the subnet. Apply firewall rules to restrict internet access.
NAT Gateway can be created for the General type, and it is a service that maps one representative public IP for Virtual Servers without public IP NAT mapping for outbound internet use.

Public IP

If you want to use the same IP address every time you stop and start an instance, you reserve and assign a Public IP.
It is a service that creates a desired public IP within Samsung Cloud Platform’s available Public IP Pool and assigns it to Compute resources.
Even if the Compute resource assigned with the specified Public IP is rebooted, the IP does not change.

Port

Provides a connection point to connect a single device, such as a server’s NIC, to a network. This allows additional devices beyond the default NIC.

VPC Endpoint

Provides an entry point to the VPC that allows access to Samsung Cloud Platform through a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.

VPC Peering

You can communicate via IP through a 1:1 private route between VPCs. By default, peering between VPCs of the same account is provided, and only one connection between different accounts is allowed.

Private NAT

Compute resources within a VPC can connect by mapping customer network IPs using Direct Connect.

Transit Gateway

Transit Gateway is a gateway service that easily connects customer networks and Samsung Cloud Platform’s networks and acts as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
Through Transit Gateway, you can configure various network topologies as desired. In addition, you can thoroughly manage security by providing independent firewall configuration and routing functions for each connected network section.

It is a service that connects a private path between the VPC and SCP services without exposing internal data of Samsung Cloud Platform to the internet.

  • PrivateLink Service is for service providers, and PrivateLink Endpoint is for service users.

Constraints

Samsung Cloud Platform’s VPC limits the number of VPCs and Subnets created as follows.

CategoryDefault QuotaDescription
VPC5Default VPC creation limit per account
VPC IP Range6IP range creation limit per VPC (default 1 + additional 5)
VPC Peering5VPC Peering creation limit per account
Subnet3Default Subnet creation limit per VPC
Private NAT3Default Private NAT creation limit per VPC
Transit Gateway3Transit Gateway creation limit per account
VPC to Transit Gateway Connection5VPC connection limit per Transit Gateway (only same account can be connected)
Table. VPC Constraints

Prerequisites

VPC has no prerequisites.

1.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

VPC - Internet Gateway sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided as basic monitoring are data collected at 5-minute intervals.

Note
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Metrics

Internet Gateway

The following are the basic metrics for the namespace Internet Gateway.

The metrics with bold metric names below are metrics selected as key metrics among the basic metrics provided by Internet Gateway. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.

For each metric, the user guide informs which statistical value is meaningful when querying that metric, and the statistical value marked in bold among meaningful statistics is the key statistical value. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics through key statistical values.

Performance ItemDescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
Network In Total Bytes_InternetCumulative traffic volume from Internet Gateway → VPCBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out Total Bytes _InternetCumulative traffic volume from VPC → Internet GatewayBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In Total Bytes _Internet_DeltaCumulative traffic volume from Internet Gateway → VPC over 5 minutes (Internet)Bytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
Network Out Total Bytes _Internet_DeltaCumulative traffic volume from VPC → Internet Gateway over 5 minutes (Internet)Bytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. VPC - Internet Gateway Basic Metrics

1.2 - How-to guides

Users can create VPC services by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create VPC

You can create and use VPC services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create VPC button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create VPC page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC NameRequiredName of the VPC to create
      • Enter 3-20 characters using uppercase/lowercase letters and numbers
      IP RangeRequiredIP range to use
      • Enter in IP range format within /16 ~ /28 range
        • Example: 192.168.0.0/24
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for VPC
      Table. VPC Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPC Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPC List page.

View VPC Details

VPC services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The VPC Details page consists of Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view VPC details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the VPC List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Details page.
    • The VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusVPC status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Error: Current status cannot be confirmed
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Terminate ServiceButton to terminate the service
      • Since terminating the service may immediately stop the operating service, proceed with the termination operation after fully considering the impact caused by service interruption
      Table. VPC Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the VPC List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In VPC, it means VPC SRN
Resource NameVPC name
Resource IDUnique resource ID of VPC
CreatorUser who created the VPC
Created AtDate and time when VPC was created
ModifierUser who modified VPC information
Modified AtDate and time when VPC information was modified
VPC NameVPC resource name
VPC IDVPC unique ID
External ConnectionInformation about resources connected externally
IP RangeVPC IP range
DescriptionVPC description
  • Can modify description by clicking Edit icon
Table. VPC Details Tab Items

IP Range Management

On the VPC List page, you can view the IP range information connected to the selected resource and add IP ranges.

CategoryDescription
IP RangeAdded IP range information
Created AtDate and time when IP range was added
Add IP RangeCan add IP range
  • Enter within 0.0.0.0/16 - 0.0.0.0/28 range
  • Example: 192.168.0.0/16
Table. VPC IP Range Management Tab Items
Note

When adding an IP range to a VPC, you cannot add it if it falls under the following conditions:

  • IP range currently in use in the VPC
  • Range added with destination as peer VPC in VPC Peering rules connected to the current VPC
  • Range added with destination as remote in Direct Connect rules connected to the current VPC
  • Range added with destination as remote in Transit Gateway rules connected to the current VPC
  • NAT IP range in use in Private NAT connected to the current VPC

Tags

On the VPC List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. VPC Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the VPC List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. VPC Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Terminate VPC

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused VPCs.

Warning
  • VPC cannot be terminated if there are connected Subnet, Internet Gateway, or Direct Connect resources.
  • VPC service can only be terminated when the status is Active or Error.
  • Terminating the service may immediately stop the operating service. Proceed with the termination operation after fully considering the impact caused by service interruption.

To terminate a VPC, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC List page.
  3. Select the resource to terminate on the VPC List page and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been terminated on the VPC List page.

1.2.1 - Subnet

Create Subnet

You can create and use VPC Subnet services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Subnet, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create Subnet page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      Subnet TypeRequiredSelect subnet type
      • General: Can configure Public and Private
      • Local: Can specify by selecting between Virtual Server and Bare Metal Server
        • Local Subnet is a subnet for server-to-server communication only and cannot communicate externally
      • VPC Endpoint: Can configure VPC Endpoint
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect the subnet from the list of currently created VPCs
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select
      VPC IP RangeOptionalAutomatically enters the CIDR range of the selected VPC
      Subnet NameRequiredName of the Subnet to create
      • Enter 3-20 characters using uppercase/lowercase letters and numbers
      IP RangeRequiredIP range to use
      • Enter in IP range format within /16 ~ /28 range
        • Example: 192.168.0.0/24
      • IP range cannot be used in duplicate with IP ranges currently in use in the VPC (other subnets)
      Gateway IPRequiredDisplays the Gateway IP address of the Subnet
      • The first IP of the entered IP range is automatically entered
      • Cannot be modified after service creation
      Table. Subnet Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for Subnet
      IP Allocation RangeOptionalCan set range within the IP range to use
      • Select from entire IP range or individual specification
      • Subnet child resources are assigned IPs within the entered entire IP range or the range individually specified by the user
        • When selecting individual specification, enter the start IP address and end IP address
      DNS Name ServerOptionalEnter DNS Name Server IP after selecting Enable
      Host RouteOptionalEnter host route after selecting Enable
      • Enter destination IP range and Next Hop IP address
      • Destination IP ranges must not overlap with each other
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Subnet Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Subnet List page.

View Subnet Details

Subnet services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Subnet Details page consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view Subnet details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Subnet List page. You will be redirected to the Subnet Details page.
    • The Subnet Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusSubnet status
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Editing: Modification in progress
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Failed: Failed to create
      • Error: Current status unknown
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete SubnetSubnet deletion button
      Table. Subnet Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the Subnet List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Subnet, it means Subnet SRN
Resource NameSubnet resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the Subnet
Created AtDate and time when Subnet was created
ModifierUser who modified Subnet information
Modified AtDate and time when Subnet information was modified
Subnet TypeSubnet type
VPC NameVPC to which the subnet belongs
Subnet NameSubnet name
Subnet IDSubnet unique ID
IP RangeIP range in use
Gateway IPGateway IP address of the Subnet
DHCP IPSecond IP address among the IP ranges in use
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
DescriptionSubnet additional description
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
IP Allocation RangeIP allocation range
DNS Name ServerWhether DNS Name Server is used
Host RouteHost route (destination IP range, Next Hop IP address) information
Table. Subnet Details Tab Items

Virtual IP Management

On the Subnet List page, you can view the virtual IP information of the selected resource, reserve, or delete it.

CategoryDescription
Reserve Virtual IPReserve Virtual IP for use
Virtual IPVirtual IP information
  • Click the IP to go to the Virtual IP details page
Public NAT IPPublic NAT IP information
Connected Port CountNumber of ports connected to the IP
Reserved AtDate and time when Virtual IP was reserved
ReleaseVirtual IP release button
  • Select multiple items and click the Release button at the top of the list to release in batch
Table. Subnet Virtual IP Management Tab Items
Warning
  • Cannot release if Port or NAT IP is connected to Virtual IP. Delete the connected resource first.
  • Can only release Virtual IP when Subnet status is Active or Error.

Tags

On the Subnet List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Subnet Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the Subnet List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. Subnet Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Manage Virtual IP

You can reserve or manage Virtual IPs to use in the Subnet.

Reserve Virtual IP

You can reserve a Virtual IP to use in the Subnet.

To reserve a Virtual IP, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to reserve a Virtual IP on the Subnet List page. You will be redirected to the Subnet Details page.
  4. Click the Virtual IP Management tab on the Subnet Details page. You will be redirected to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the Reserve Virtual IP button on the Virtual IP Management tab page. The Virtual IP reservation window opens.
  6. Set the detailed items in the Reserve Virtual IP window and click Confirm.
    • Virtual IP: If you select Auto Generate, the automatically generated IP is reserved. If you select Input, you can reserve the IP you entered directly.
    • Description: Enter additional description for the Virtual IP.
  7. When the reservation confirmation window appears, click Confirm.

View Virtual IP Details

You can view the detailed information of a Virtual IP.

To view the detailed information of a Virtual IP, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to reserve a Virtual IP on the Subnet List page. You will be redirected to the Subnet Details page.
  4. Click the Virtual IP Management tab on the Subnet Details page. You will be redirected to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the resource you want to view on the Virtual IP Management tab page. You will be redirected to the Virtual IP Details page.
    • The Virtual IP Details page displays connected ports and detailed information.
      CategoryDescription
      Virtual IPVirtual IP address
      Public NAT IPPublic NAT IP address and status
      • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
      • After setting Enable, can select existing IP or create and add
        • Public NAT IP cannot be modified after setting, needs to be reset when changing
      Connected PortPort information connected to Virtual IP
      • Click Add button to add connected port, can connect existing port or create and add
      • Click Delete button to delete connected port
      DescriptionVirtual IP description
      • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
      CreatorUser who reserved the Virtual IP
      Created AtDate and time when Virtual IP was reserved
      ModifierUser who modified Virtual IP information
      Modified AtDate and time when Virtual IP information was modified
      Table. Virtual IP Details Items

Delete Subnet

You can delete unused Subnets.

Warning
  • Cannot terminate the service if there are connected resources. Delete the connected resources first.
  • Can only delete the service when the service status is Active or Error.
  • Data cannot be recovered after service deletion, so proceed with the deletion operation after fully considering the impact caused by Subnet deletion.

To delete a Subnet, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Subnet menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the Subnet List page. You will be redirected to the Subnet Details page.
  4. Click the Delete button on the Subnet Details page.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the Subnet List.

Prerequisites

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service for more details.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. Subnet Prerequisites

1.2.2 - Port

Create Port

You can create and use Port services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Port, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create Port button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create Port page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to create the Port
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select
      Subnet NameRequiredSelect the Subnet to create the Port
      • Click + Create New to create a Subnet and then select
      Port NameRequiredName that can easily identify the Port
      • Enter 3-20 characters using letters, numbers, -
      IP Allocation MethodRequiredSelect IP allocation method
      • Automatic Allocation: IP is automatically allocated within the Subnet’s IP allocation range
      • Manual Input: The entered IP within the Subnet’s range is allocated
        • When selecting Manual Input, enter the IP address to use for the Port in Fixed IP Address
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for Port
      Security GroupOptionalWhen selecting Enable, can select up to 5 Security Groups
      Table. Port Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Port Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Port List page.

View Port Details

Port services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Port Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view Port details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Port menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Port List page.
  3. Click the resource (Port name) for which you want to view detailed information on the Port List page. You will be redirected to the Port Details page.
    • The Port Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusPort status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Down: Not connected to resource, or connected but not operating
      • Error: Current status cannot be confirmed
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete PortButton to delete Port
      Table. Port Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the Port List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Port, it means Port SRN
Resource NamePort resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
Resource IDUnique resource ID of the Port
CreatorUser who created the Port
Created AtDate and time when Port was created
ModifierUser who modified Port information
Modified AtDate and time when Port information was modified
Port NamePort resource name
Port IDPort resource ID
Subnet NameConnected Subnet name, click Subnet item to go to details page
Connected ResourceConnected device information
Fixed IPFixed IP information
MAC AddressMAC address information
DescriptionDescription for Port
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
Security GroupConnected Security Group information
  • Can change Security Group by clicking Edit icon
Virtual IPConnected Virtual IP information
Table. Port Details Tab Items

Tags

On the Port List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Port Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the Port List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. Port Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Delete Port

You can reduce operating costs by deleting unused Ports.

Warning
  • Cannot delete the service if there are connected resources such as Virtual Server, PrivateLink, etc. Delete the connected resources first.
  • After service deletion, the operating service may be stopped immediately. Proceed with the deletion operation after fully considering the impact caused by service deletion.

To delete a Port, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Port menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Port List page.
  3. Click the resource (Port name) to delete on the Port List page. You will be redirected to the Port Details page.
  4. Click the Delete Port button on the Port Details page.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the Port List.

Prerequisites

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service for more details.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. Port Prerequisites

1.2.3 - Internet Gateway

Create Internet Gateway

You can create and use Internet Gateway services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create an Internet Gateway, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create Internet Gateway button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create Internet Gateway page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect to the Internet Gateway
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select
      TypeRequiredSelect Internet Gateway type
      • Select from Dedicated Internet Gateway, Secured Internet Gateway, Group Gateway
      Internet Gateway NameOptionalAutomatically generated as IGW_{VPC Name}
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for Internet Gateway
      Use FirewallOptionalSelect whether to use Firewall
      Store Firewall LogsOptionalSelect whether to store Firewall logs
      Table. Internet Gateway Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Internet Gateway Additional Information Input Items
Warning
Cannot connect Internet Gateway and Group Gateway simultaneously in one VPC.
  1. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Internet Gateway List page.

View Internet Gateway Details

Internet Gateway services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Internet Gateway Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view Internet Gateway details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Internet Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Internet Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway Details page.
    • The Internet Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusInternet Gateway status
      • Creating: Resource creation in progress
      • Active: Normal connection status
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Error: Current status cannot be confirmed
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete Internet GatewayInternet Gateway deletion button
      Table. Internet Gateway Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Internet Gateway, it means Internet Gateway SRN
Resource NameInternet Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the Internet Gateway
Created AtDate and time when Internet Gateway was created
ModifierUser who modified Internet Gateway information
Modified AtDate and time when Internet Gateway information was modified
Internet Gateway NameInternet Gateway name
Internet Gateway IDInternet Gateway resource ID
VPC NameVPC name
VPC NameVPC ID
TypeInternet Gateway type
DescriptionDescription for Internet Gateway
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
Firewall NameGo to details page when clicking Firewall
Use FirewallWhether to use Firewall
NAT GatewayGo to details page when clicking NAT Gateway
Store NAT LogsWhether to store NAT logs
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
  • Enable: Store logs
  • Disable: Do not store logs
Table. Internet Gateway Details Tab Items

Tags

On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Internet Gateway Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. Internet Gateway Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Manage Internet Gateway Resources

You can manage resources such as using NAT log storage.

Use NAT Log Storage

Note

To use NAT log storage, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store logs and set that bucket as the log storage in NAT Logging. Then, when you enable log storage in NAT details view, NAT logs will start being stored in the Object Storage bucket. You can check the log storage settings in NAT Logging. For more information, refer to NAT Logging.

  • Object Storage fees for log storage will be charged when you set up a log storage.

To use NAT log storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Internet Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Internet Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Modify NAT Log Storage button. You will be redirected to the Modify NAT Log Storage popup window.
  5. Select Enable for log storage in the Modify NAT Log Storage popup window and click the Confirm button.
Warning
Cannot set log storage to Enable if log storage is not configured in NAT Logging.

Disable NAT Log Storage

To disable NAT log storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Internet Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Internet Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Modify NAT Log Storage button. You will be redirected to the Modify NAT Log Storage popup window.
  5. Deselect Enable for log storage in the Modify NAT Log Storage popup window and click the Confirm button.
  6. Verify the message in the Notification popup window and click the Confirm button.
Warning
If you disable log storage, log storage for that service will be stopped and tracking management through log analysis will not be possible in case of security incidents.

Delete Internet Gateway

Warning
  • Cannot terminate the service if there are connected resources such as NAT Gateway, Firewall rules, VPN, etc. Delete the connected resources first.
  • After service deletion, internet communication of VPC child resources will be stopped. Proceed with the deletion operation after fully considering the impact caused by Internet Gateway deletion.

To delete an Internet Gateway, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Internet Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the Internet Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the Internet Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Delete button on the Internet Gateway Details page.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the Internet Gateway List.

Prerequisites

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service for more details.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. Internet Gateway Prerequisites

1.2.4 - NAT Gateway

Create NAT Gateway

You can create and use NAT Gateway services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a NAT Gateway, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create NAT Gateway button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create NAT Gateway page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select
      Subnet NameRequiredSelect the connected Subnet
      • Click + Create New to create a Subnet and then select
      NAT Gateway NameOptionalCreated as NAT_GW_{Subnet Name}
      IP for NAT GatewayRequiredSelect Public IP for NAT Gateway
      • Click + Create New to create an IP and then select
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for NAT Gateway
      Table. NAT Gateway Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. NAT Gateway Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the NAT Gateway List page.

View NAT Gateway Details

NAT Gateway services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The NAT Gateway Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the NAT Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the NAT Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the NAT Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the NAT Gateway Details page.
    • The NAT Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusNAT Gateway status
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      Delete NAT GatewayButton to terminate the service
      • Terminate NAT Gateway if there are no connected services
      • Since terminating the service may immediately stop the operating service, proceed with the termination operation after fully considering the impact caused by service interruption
      Table. NAT Gateway Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the NAT Gateway List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In NAT Gateway, it means NAT Gateway SRN
Resource NameNAT Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the NAT Gateway
Created AtDate and time when NAT Gateway was created
ModifierUser who modified NAT Gateway information
Modified AtDate and time when NAT Gateway information was modified
NAT Gateway NameNAT Gateway name
NAT Gateway IDNAT Gateway resource ID
VPC NameVPC name connected to NAT Gateway
  • Go to details page when clicking VPC
VPC IDVPC resource ID connected to NAT Gateway
Subnet NameSubnet name connected to NAT Gateway
  • Go to details page when clicking Subnet
Subnet IDSubnet resource ID connected to NAT Gateway
Subnet IP RangeSubnet IP range information
IP for NAT GatewayNAT Gateway IP information
DescriptionDescription for NAT Gateway
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
Table. NAT Gateway Details Tab Items

Tags

On the NAT Gateway List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. NAT Gateway Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the NAT Gateway List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. NAT Gateway Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Delete NAT Gateway

Warning
If you delete a NAT Gateway, all resources in that Subnet except resources with 1:1 NAT configured will not be able to communicate with the internet.

To delete a NAT Gateway, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the NAT Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the NAT Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the NAT Gateway List page. You will be redirected to the NAT Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Delete button on the NAT Gateway Details page.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the NAT Gateway List.

Prerequisites

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service for more details.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. NAT Gateway Prerequisites

1.2.5 - Public IP

Create Public IP

You can create and use Public IP services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Public IP, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. Click the Reserve Public IP button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Reserve Public IP page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TypeRequiredSelect the Gateway to reserve Public IP
      • Default: Internet Gateway
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for Public IP
      Table. Public IP Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Public IP Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Public IP List page.

View Public IP Details

Public IP services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Public IP Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view Public IP details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Public IP menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Public IP List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Public IP List page. You will be redirected to the Public IP Details page.
    • The Public IP Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusPublic IP status
      • Attached: Connected state
      • Reserved: Reserved state
      • Error: Current status unknown
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Release Public IPPublic IP release button
      Table. Public IP Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the Public IP List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Public IP, it means Public IP SRN
Resource NamePublic IP resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the Public IP
Created AtDate and time when Public IP was created
ModifierUser who modified Public IP information
Modified AtDate and time when Public IP information was modified
IP AddressAssigned (reserved) IP address
TypeGateway information where Public IP is reserved
Public IP IDPublic IP resource ID
DescriptionDescription for Public IP
  • Can modify description by clicking Edit icon
Connected Resource TypeResource information connected to the assigned (reserved) IP address
Connected Resource NameResource name connected to the assigned (reserved) IP address
Table. Public IP Details Tab Items

Tags

On the Public IP List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Public IP Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the Public IP List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. Port Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Release Public IP

Warning
Can only release when the status of the Public IP service is Reserved. Check the service status before applying for release.

To delete a Public IP, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Public IP button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Public IP List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Public IP List page. You will be redirected to the Public IP Details page.
  4. Click the Release Public IP button on the Public IP Details page.
  5. After release is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the Public IP List.

Prerequisites

This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment.
Table. Public IP Prerequisites

1.2.6 - Private NAT

Users can create the Private NAT service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Private NAT

You can create and use the Private NAT service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a Private NAT.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create Private NAT button on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create Private NAT page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Private NAT NameRequiredEnter the Private NAT name
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using English letters and numbers
      Connected Resource TypeRequiredSelect the connected resource to connect to Private NAT
      • Can select from Direct Connect, Transit Gateway
      Connected Resource NameRequiredDisplay the name of the selected connected resource
      • Click + Create New in the list to create a connected resource
      NAT IP RangeRequiredEnter the NAT IP range to use
      • Enter in CIDR format such as 192.168.2.0/23
      • Cannot overlap with connected VPC IP or other Private NAT IP ranges
      DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for the Private NAT
      Table. Private NAT Service Information Input Items
Note
  • Must not overlap with the IP range of the VPC connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
  • Must not overlap with other Private NAT ranges connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
  • Must not overlap with the IP range of the On-Premise Network connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
  • Some IP ranges are for management purposes and cannot be used.
* Enter or select the required information in the **Enter Additional Information** section.

Division
Required
Detailed Description
TagsOptionalAdd tags
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Private NAT Additional Information Input Items
3. Review the detailed information and estimated billing cost in the Summary panel, and click the Create button. * When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the Private NAT List page.

Viewing Private NAT Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the Private NAT service. The Private NAT Detail page consists of Detail Information, IP Management, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view Private NAT detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private NAT menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Private NAT List page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT Detail page.
    • The Private NAT Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, IP Management, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      StatusPrivate NAT status
      • Active: Running
      • Creating: Creating
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred
      Delete Private NATButton to delete Private NAT
      Table. Private NAT Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the Private NAT List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NamePrivate NAT resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the Private NAT
Created AtDate and time when the Private NAT was created
ModifierUser who modified the Private NAT information
Modified AtDate and time when the Private NAT information was modified
Private NAT NamePrivate NAT resource name
Connected Resource TypeResource information connected to Private NAT
NAT IP RangeNAT IP range information in use
Connected Resource NameResource information connected to Private NAT, clicking the resource name navigates to the detail information page
DescriptionDescription of Private NAT
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Table. Private NAT Detail Information Tab Items

IP Management

You can view Private NAT IPs on the Private NAT List page, and reserve or release them.

DivisionDetailed Description
Private NAT IP ListList of Private NAT IPs in use
  • Can view Private NAT IP, connected resource, and status
  • Click the Reserve Private NAT IP button to add an IP
  • Click the Release button to delete the selected IP
Table. Private NAT IP Management Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the Private NAT List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Private NAT Tag Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the Private NAT List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date and time, resource name, task details, task result, task operator information
Table. Private NAT Task History Tab Detail Information Items

Managing Private NAT IP

You can reserve or release Private NAT IPs.

Reserving Private NAT IP

Follow these steps to reserve a Private NAT IP.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private NAT menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to reserve an IP on the Private NAT List page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT Detail page.
  4. Click the IP Management tab on the Private NAT Detail page. You will be navigated to the IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the Reserve Private NAT IP button on the IP Management tab page. The Private NAT IP reservation window appears.
  6. Enter the Private NAT IP to use in the Private NAT IP reservation window and click the OK button. A notification confirmation window appears.
  7. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the resource item has been added to the IP list.

Releasing Private NAT IP

Caution
You can only release Private NAT IPs when the status is Reserved.

Follow these steps to release a Private NAT IP.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private NAT menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to reserve an IP on the Private NAT List page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT Detail page.
  4. Click the IP Management tab on the Private NAT Detail page. You will be navigated to the IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the Release button for the IP item you want to release on the IP Management tab page. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the IP list.

Deleting Private NAT

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused Private NATs.

Caution
You cannot terminate the Private NAT service when the service status is Creating, Editing, or Deleting.

Follow these steps to terminate a Private NAT.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private NAT menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT List page.
  3. Click the resource you want to delete on the Private NAT List page. You will be navigated to the Private NAT Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete Private NAT button on the Private NAT Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted in the Private NAT List.

Prerequisite Services

These are services that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the previously notified user guide.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in the cloud environment
NetworkingDirect ConnectService that safely and quickly connects the customer network to the Samsung Cloud Platform environment
Table. Private NAT Prerequisite Services

1.2.7 - VPC Endpoint

Create VPC Endpoint

You can create and use VPC Endpoint services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC Endpoint, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create VPC Endpoint button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create VPC Endpoint page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to create the Endpoint
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select
      Usage > Target ServiceRequiredSelect the target service to create the VPC Endpoint
      Usage > Connected ResourceRequiredSelect the resource to create the VPC Endpoint
      VPC Endpoint NameRequiredEnter the VPC Endpoint name
      • Enter 3-20 characters using letters and numbers
      VPC Endpoint IP > Subnet NameRequiredSelect the VPC Endpoint Subnet
      • Click + Create New to create a Subnet and then select
      VPC Endpoint IP > IPRequiredEnter the IP to use as VPC Endpoint
      • Example: 192.168.x.x
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for VPC Endpoint
      Table. VPC Endpoint Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPC Endpoint Additional Information Input Items
      Note

      After registering a VPC Endpoint, you must configure Direct Connect firewall settings to integrate with Samsung Cloud Platform internal services. Refer to the port information for each service to register firewall rules.

      ServicePort Information
      DNSTCP 53, UDP 53
      Object StorageTCP 8080, 8443, 80, 443, 4430
      File Storage(NFS) TCP/UDP common 111, 300, 302, 304, 2049, 635, 4045, 4046, 4049
      (CIFS) UDP 135, 137, 138, 389 / TCP 135, 139, 445, 40001
      Container Registry (Auth Server, Registry)TCP 443
      Table. Allowed Port Information by Target Service
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPC Endpoint List page.

View VPC Endpoint Details

VPC Endpoint services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The VPC Endpoint Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view Endpoint details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Endpoint List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the VPC Endpoint List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Endpoint Details page.
    • The VPC Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusVPC Endpoint status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Deleting: Deleting resource connection
      • Deleted: Resource connection deleted
      Delete VPC EndpointButton to delete VPC Endpoint connection resource
      Table. VPC Endpoint Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the VPC Endpoint List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In VPC Endpoint, it means VPC Endpoint SRN
Resource NameVPC Endpoint resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the VPC Endpoint
Created AtDate and time when VPC Endpoint was created
ModifierUser who modified VPC Endpoint information
Modified AtDate and time when VPC Endpoint information was modified
VPC Endpoint NameVPC Endpoint name
VPC NameConnected VPC name, click VPC item to go to details page
VPC IDConnected VPC ID
Target ServiceConnected target information
Connected Resource InformationConnected resource information
Subnet NameEndpoint subnet information, click subnet item to go to details page
VPC Endpoint IPVPC Endpoint IP information
DescriptionDescription for VPC Endpoint
  • Can modify by clicking Edit icon
Table. VPC Endpoint Details Tab Items

Tags

On the VPC Endpoint List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. VPC Endpoint Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the VPC Endpoint List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. VPC Endpoint Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Delete VPC Endpoint

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused Endpoints.

Warning
  • Cannot terminate the service if there are connected resources such as Object Storage, Container Registry, etc. Delete the connected resources first.
  • Deleting a VPC Endpoint may immediately stop the operating service. Proceed with the deletion operation after fully considering the impact caused by service deletion.

To terminate a VPC Endpoint, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Endpoint List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the VPC Endpoint List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Endpoint Details page.
  4. Click the Delete Endpoint button on the VPC Endpoint Details page.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the VPC Endpoint List.

Prerequisites

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
NetworkingDirect ConnectService that securely and quickly connects customer networks and Samsung Cloud Platform
Table. VPC Endpoint Prerequisites

1.2.8 - VPC Peering

Users can create VPC Peering services by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create VPC Peering

You can create and use VPC Peering services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC Peering, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create VPC Peering button on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the Create VPC Peering page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      VPC Peering NameRequiredEnter the VPC Peering name
      • Enter 3-20 characters using letters and numbers
      Request VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to request VPC Peering
      • Click + Create New in the list to create a VPC
      Approval AccountRequiredSelect the Account of the VPC to approve VPC Peering and then select that VPC or enter information
      • When selecting Same account, select the approval VPC name
        • Click + Create New in the list to create a VPC
      • When selecting Different account, enter the approval Account ID and approval VPC ID
      DescriptionOptionalEnter description for VPC Peering
      Table. VPC Peering Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Category
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPC Peering Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • If connecting to a VPC of a different Account, the connection operation may take time as Peering proceeds after the approval process.
    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPC Peering List page.

View VPC Peering Details

VPC Peering services allow you to view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The VPC Peering Details page consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view VPC Peering details, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the VPC Peering List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering Details page.
    • The VPC Peering Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDescription
      StatusVPC Peering status
      • Active: Operating
      • Requesting: Connection or deletion request in progress
      • Creating: Connecting
      • Creating Requesting: Connection request in progress
      • Deleting Requesting: Deletion request in progress
      • Editing: Modification in progress
      • Rejected: Approval rejected
      • Canceled: Request canceled
      • Error: Error occurred
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete VPC Peering/Request VPC Peering DeletionButton to request deletion of VPC Peering resource
      • Cancel Connection Request: Can cancel if VPC Peering connection was requested
      • Approve Connection: Can approve if VPC Peering connection request was received
        • Can reject connection by clicking Reject Connection
      • Cancel Deletion Request: Can cancel if VPC Peering deletion was requested
      • Approve Deletion: Can approve if VPC Peering deletion request was received
        • Can reject deletion by clicking Reject Deletion
      • Request Reapproval: Request reapproval if VPC approval was rejected
      Table. VPC Peering Status Information and Additional Features

Details

On the VPC Peering List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameVPC Peering resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the VPC Peering
Created AtDate and time when VPC Peering was created
ModifierUser who modified VPC Peering information
Modified AtDate and time when VPC Peering information was modified
VPC Peering NameVPC Peering name
Request InformationVPC name and VPC ID information that requested VPC Peering, click VPC name to go to details page
  • If connecting to VPC of a different Account, that VPC name is not displayed
Approval InformationVPC name and VPC ID information that approved VPC Peering, click VPC name to go to details page
  • If connecting to VPC of a different Account, that VPC name is not displayed
DescriptionDescription for VPC Peering
  • Can modify description by clicking Edit icon
Table. VPC Peering Details Items

Rules

On the VPC Peering List page, you can view the rules connected to the selected resource, and add or delete them.

CategoryDescription
Rule ListList of connected rules
  • Can verify source, destination, destination IP range, and status of connected rules
  • Click Add Rule button to add rules
  • Click Delete button to delete selected rules
Table. VPC Peering Rules Tab Items

Tags

On the VPC Peering List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete tags.

CategoryDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • Can verify Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. VPC Peering Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the VPC Peering List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Verify operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. VPC Peering Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Manage VPC Peering Rules

You can add or delete rules to VPC Peering.

Add Rules

Warning
  • Can only add rules when VPC Peering status is Active.
  • If you enter the destination IP incorrectly in routing settings, communication failure may occur. Verify the destination IP information again before creating rules.

To add rules to VPC Peering, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the VPC Peering List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the VPC Peering Details page. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Add Rule button on the Rules tab page. The add rule window appears.
  6. Enter the source and destination in the add rule window and click the Confirm button. The notification confirmation window appears.
    • Must not duplicate with already entered rules.
    • Can enter within the IP range range of the destination VPC.
    • Must enter the same as the Subnet range.
    • Cannot use 0.0.0.0/0 as the destination IP range.
  7. Click the Confirm button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the resource item has been added to the rule list.

Delete Rules

Warning
  • Can only delete connected rules when VPC Peering service status is Active or Error.
  • Cannot delete when the status of connected rules is Creating or Deleting.

To delete rules of VPC Peering, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the VPC Peering List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the VPC Peering Details page. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button of the item to delete on the Rules tab page. The notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the Confirm button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted in the rule list.

Terminate VPC Peering

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused VPC Peering.

Warning
  • Cannot terminate the service if rules are connected to VPC Peering. Delete all connected rules before terminating the service.
  • Can only terminate when VPC Peering service status is Active, Rejected, Canceled, or Error.

Terminate VPC Peering in Same Account

To terminate VPC Peering within the same Account, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the VPC Peering List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. Click the Delete VPC Peering button on the VPC Peering Details page.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the VPC Peering List.

Terminate VPC Peering Connected to Different Account

To terminate VPC Peering connected to a different Account, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be redirected to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. Click the resource to delete on the VPC Peering List page. You will be redirected to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. Click the Request VPC Peering Deletion button on the VPC Peering Details page.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the VPC Peering List.
    • The deletion request must be approved by the peer Account for normal termination.

Prerequisites

This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. VPC Peering Prerequisites

1.2.9 - Transit Gateway

Users can create the Transit Gateway service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Transit Gateway

You can create and use the Transit Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create Transit Gateway button on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create Transit Gateway page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Transit Gateway NameRequiredEnter the Transit Gateway name
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using English letters and numbers
      DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for the Transit Gateway
      Table. Transit Gateway Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Transit Gateway Additional Information Input Items
  3. Review the detailed information and estimated billing cost in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the Transit Gateway List page.

Viewing Transit Gateway Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the Transit Gateway service. The Transit Gateway Detail page consists of Detail Information, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view Transit Gateway detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
    • The Transit Gateway Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      StatusTransit Gateway status
      • Active: Running
      • Creating: Creating
      • Editing: Modifying
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred
      Delete Transit GatewayButton to delete Transit Gateway resource
      Table. Transit Gateway Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the Transit Gateway List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameTransit Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the Transit Gateway
Created AtDate and time when the Transit Gateway was created
ModifierUser who modified the Transit Gateway information
Modified AtDate and time when the Transit Gateway information was modified
Transit Gateway NameTransit Gateway resource name
Uplink UsageUplink information connected to Transit Gateway
  • Clicking Linked Service (IGW,FW) Line Application/Modification/Termination Request Shortcut navigates to the service application page
DescriptionDescription of Transit Gateway
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Firewall Connection StatusFirewall connection management and status display
  • Clicking the Firewall Connection button requests connection
    • After connection, can add or delete Firewalls from the list
Table. Transit Gateway Detail Information Tab Items

Connected VPC Management

You can view VPCs connected to the resource selected on the Transit Gateway List page, and add or delete them.

DivisionDetailed Description
VPC ListList of connected VPCs
  • Can view connected VPC information and status
  • Click the Add VPC Connection button to add a VPC
  • Click the Delete button to delete the selected VPC
Table. Transit Gateway Connected VPC Management Tab Items

Rules

You can view rules connected to the resource selected on the Transit Gateway List page, and add or delete them.

DivisionDetailed Description
Rule ListList of connected rules
  • Can view source, destination, destination IP range, and status of connected rules
  • Click the Add Rule button to add a rule
  • Click the Delete button to delete the selected rule
Table. Transit Gateway Rules Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the Transit Gateway List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Transit Gateway Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the Transit Gateway List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date and time, resource name, task details, task result, task operator information
Table. Transit Gateway Task History Tab Detail Information Items

Managing Transit Gateway Linked Services

You can apply for, modify, and terminate Uplink and Firewall connection services required for using the Transit Gateway service.

Follow these steps to apply for Transit Gateway linked services.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click Linked Service (IGW,FW) Line Application/Modification/Termination Request Shortcut on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the service request page.
  5. Enter or select the corresponding information in the required input field on the Service Request page.
    Input ItemDetailed Description
    TitleEnter the title of the service request content
    • Example: TGW Uplink Line Application
    RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
    • Automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
    ServiceSelect service category and service
    • Service Category: Networking
    • Service: Transit Gateway
    Task TypeSelect the type you want to request
    • TGW Uplink Line Application/Modification/Termination: After selecting task type, enter detailed information in the service request type item
    ContentFill in detailed items of the service application form
    • Service Request Type: Enter directly among Application / Modification / Termination
    • Account Name/ID: Enter Account name and ID
    • Transit Gateway Name/ID: Enter created Transit Gateway name and ID
    • Applicant Information: Enter applicant email, phone number, etc.
    • Service Request Task Type: Select and enter among Uplink Line Connection / BM VPC Firewall Connection
    • Firewall Usage: Enter whether to use firewall
    AttachmentUpload files if you want to share additional files
    • Can attach up to 5 files, each within 5MB
    • Can only attach doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files
    Table. Linked Service Creation Request Items
  6. Click the Request button on the service request page.
    • When application is complete, verify the applied content on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    • When the service request task is complete, you can verify the applied resource on the Transit Gateway Detail page.

Managing VPC Connection for Transit Gateway

You can add or delete VPCs to the Transit Gateway.

Adding VPC Connection

Follow these steps to add a VPC connection to the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Connected VPC Management tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Connected VPC Management tab page.
  5. Click the Add VPC Connection button on the Connected VPC Management tab page. The VPC connection addition window appears.
  6. Select a VPC in the VPC connection addition window and click the OK button. A notification confirmation window appears.
    • Clicking + Create New in the list allows you to create a VPC and select it.
  7. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the resource item has been added to the VPC connection list.

Deleting VPC Connection

Follow these steps to delete a VPC connection from the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Connected VPC Management tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Connected VPC Management tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button for the item you want to delete on the Connected VPC Management tab page. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the VPC connection list.

Managing Rules for Transit Gateway

You can add or delete rules to the Transit Gateway.

Adding Rules

Caution
  • You can only add rules when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
  • If you enter the destination IP incorrectly in routing settings, communication failures may occur. Please verify the destination IP information again before creating a rule.

Follow these steps to add a rule to the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Add Rule button on the Rules tab page. The rule addition window appears.
  6. Enter the source and destination in the rule addition window and click the OK button. A notification confirmation window appears.
    DivisionDetailed Description
    Rule TypeSelect Transit Gateway rule addition type
    • Select from VPC-TGW Rule, TGW-Uplink Rule
    Connected VPC NameSelect connected VPC when selecting VPC-TGW Rule
    SourceAutomatically selected when destination is set when selecting VPC-TGW Rule
    DestinationSelect destination of rule
    • Set to VPC, TGW when selecting VPC-TGW Rule
    • Set to TGW, Remote when selecting TGW-Uplink Rule
      • Cannot register duplicate with existing rules, can enter up to x.x.x.x/28 range
    Destination IP RangeEnter the destination IP range to use
    Table. Rule Addition Input Items
    Caution
    • When entering VPC-TGW Rule, verify the following items:
      • When destination is VPC
        • Can enter within VPC IP range.
        • Must enter the same as Subnet range.
        • Cannot use 0.0.0.0/0 as destination IP range.
      • When destination is Transit Gateway
        • Some IP ranges are for management purposes and cannot be used.
        • Cannot enter VPC IP range.
        • Can enter 0.0.0.0/0 as destination IP range only when VPC’s Internet Gateway is not connected.
    • When entering TGW-Uplink Rule, verify the following items:
      • When destination is Transit Gateway
        • Can enter within VPC IP range connected to Transit Gateway.
        • Cannot use 0.0.0.0/0 as destination IP range.
      • When destination is Remote
        • Cannot enter VPC IP range connected to Transit Gateway.
        • Can enter 0.0.0.0/0 as destination IP range only when Internet Gateway is not connected to Transit Gateway.
        • Cannot enter D, E class IP ranges.
  7. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the resource item has been added to the rule list.

Deleting Rules

Caution
  • You can only delete rules when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
  • You cannot delete rules when the rule status is Creating, Deleting.

Follow these steps to delete a rule from the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button for the item you want to delete on the Rules tab page. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the rule list.

Managing Firewall Connection

You can connect or disconnect Firewalls to use with the Transit Gateway.

Connecting Firewall

Follow these steps to add a Firewall connection to the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to connect Firewall on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Detail Information tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Detail Information tab page.
  5. Click the Firewall Connection button on the Detail Information tab page. The Firewall connection confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the OK button in the Firewall connection confirmation window. Verify the connection status in the Firewall connection status item.

Adding Firewall

After Firewall connection is complete, you can add Firewalls.

Follow these steps to add a Firewall to the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to add Firewall on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Detail Information tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Detail Information tab page.
  5. Click the Add button in the Firewall list on the Detail Information tab page. The Firewall addition window appears.
  6. Select the purpose in the Firewall addition window and click the OK button. Verify that the resource item has been added to the Firewall list.

Deleting Firewall

After Firewall connection is complete, you can delete Firewalls.

Follow these steps to delete a Firewall from the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete Firewall on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Detail Information tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Detail Information tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button in the Firewall list on the Detail Information tab page. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify that the resource item has been deleted from the Firewall list.

Disconnecting Firewall

You can disconnect unused Firewall connections.

Caution
You can only disconnect connections when the Firewall service status is Active, Error.

Follow these steps to disconnect a Firewall connection from the Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to disconnect Firewall connection on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Detail Information tab on the Transit Gateway Detail page. You will be navigated to the Detail Information tab page.
  5. Click the Disconnect Firewall Connection button on the Detail Information tab page. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the OK button in the notification confirmation window. Verify the disconnection status in the Firewall connection status item.

Deleting Transit Gateway

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused Transit Gateways.

Caution
  • You cannot terminate the service when Uplink connected to Transit Gateway is in use or Firewall is connected. Complete the termination request for connected resources before terminating the service.
  • You cannot terminate the service when VPC resources or rules are connected to Transit Gateway. Delete all connected resources and rules before terminating the service.
  • You cannot terminate the service when the Transit Gateway service status is Creating, Deleting.

Follow these steps to terminate a Transit Gateway.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Click the resource you want to delete on the Transit Gateway List page. You will be navigated to the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete Transit Gateway button on the Transit Gateway Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted in the Transit Gateway List.

Prerequisite Services

These are services that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the previously notified user guide.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in the cloud environment.
Table. Transit Gateway Prerequisite Services

1.2.10 - PrivateLink Service

Users can create the PrivateLink Service service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating PrivateLink Service

You can create and use the PrivateLink Service service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a PrivateLink Service.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create PrivateLink Service button on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create PrivateLink Service page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      PrivateLink Service NameRequiredEnter the PrivateLink Service name
      Approval MethodRequiredSelect and enter PrivateLink Service approval method
      • Automatic: Automatically approve when PrivateLink Service connection request is received
      • Manual: Manually approve after verification when PrivateLink Service connection request is received
      • Approval method cannot be modified after creation
      High-Speed Data TransferOptionalDefault setting is disabled and not displayed in Samsung Cloud Platform Console
      • To use high-speed data transfer, apply for service usage at Support Center > Contact Us, and when processing is complete, you can select it on the screen
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect
      • Clicking + Create New allows you to create a VPC and then select it
      Subnet NameRequiredSelect the Subnet of the VPC to connect
      • Clicking + Create New allows you to create a Subnet and then select it
      PrivateLink Service IPRequiredEnter PrivateLink Service IP after selecting the Subnet to connect
      • Cannot enter IPs already in use within the Subnet, cannot use the first/last IP of Subnet IP range
      Connected ResourceRequiredSelect the resource to connect to the selected VPC
      • Load Balancer: Select Load Balancer to connect (cannot select LB if using Local subnet)
      • IP: Enter Compute resource IP of the selected VPC
      Security GroupOptionalClick the Select button to select the Security Group to connect
      • Can select up to 5
      • If Security Group is not selected, all access is blocked
      DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for the PrivateLink Service
      Table. PrivateLink Service Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. PrivateLink Service Additional Information Input Items
  3. Review the detailed information and estimated billing cost in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the PrivateLink Service List page.
Note

PrivateLink product is a service that provides a one-way private path (a type of tunnel). PrivateLink product is used by creating a PrivateLink Service (exit) in the service provider account and creating a PrivateLink Endpoint (entrance) in the user account, then connecting to the PrivateLink Service.

The connection conditions for PrivateLink product are as follows:

  • One PrivateLink Endpoint can only be connected to the single PrivateLink Service specified at the time of creation. (Only one pair of entrance and exit exists)
  • Cannot attempt session connection to PrivateLink Endpoint through PrivateLink Service. (One-way)
  • In the provider account, when creating PrivateLink Service, connection is provided to one IP by selecting one LB or through direct input.
  • In the user account, all clients that the user account has allowed access to the PrivateLink Endpoint can use the PrivateLink Endpoint.
    • Can be used in both General / Local Subnet.

Viewing PrivateLink Service Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the PrivateLink Service service. The PrivateLink Service Detail page consists of Detail Information, Connection Management, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view PrivateLink Service detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the PrivateLink Service menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Service List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the PrivateLink Service List page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Service Detail page.
    • The PrivateLink Service Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, Connection Management, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      StatusPrivateLink Service status
      • Active: Running
      • Creating: Creating
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred
      Delete PrivateLink ServiceButton to delete PrivateLink Service resource
      Table. PrivateLink Service Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Service List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NamePrivateLink Service resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the PrivateLink Service
Created AtDate and time when the PrivateLink Service was created
ModifierUser who modified the PrivateLink Service information
Modified AtDate and time when the PrivateLink Service information was modified
PrivateLink Service NamePrivateLink Service resource name
PrivateLink Service IDPrivateLink Service ID information
Connected ResourceConnected resource of PrivateLink Service
  • Clicking connected resource name navigates to detail page
PrivateLink Service IPPrivateLink Service IP address
VPC NameConnected VPC information
  • Clicking VPC name navigates to detail page
Subnet NameConnected Subnet information
  • Clicking Subnet name navigates to detail page
Port NamePort information of PrivateLink Service
  • Clicking Port name navigates to detail page
Security GroupConfigured Security Group information
  • Clicking Security Group name navigates to detail page
Approval MethodConfigured PrivateLink Service approval method
High-Speed Data TransferWhether configured PrivateLink Service high-speed data transfer is enabled
DescriptionDescription of PrivateLink Service
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Table. PrivateLink Service Detail Information Tab Items

Connection Management

You can view the connection information of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Service List page. You can verify connection requests and approve or reject them.

DivisionDetailed Description
PrivateLink Service ListPrivateLink Service connection list
  • Can verify connection information and status, manage connections
  • Approve: Approve the connection request
  • Reject: Reject the connection request
  • Block: Block the connected PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Reconnect: Reconnect the blocked PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Cannot execute approval/rejection etc. when connection status is Rejected, Error
Table. PrivateLink Service Connection Management Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Service List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. PrivateLink Service Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Service List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date and time, resource name, task details, task result, task operator information
Table. PrivateLink Service Task History Tab Detail Information Items

Deleting PrivateLink Service

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused PrivateLink Services.

Caution
You cannot terminate the service when the status of Private Endpoint connected to PrivateLink Service is Active, Requesting, Creating, Deleting, Error.
Delete the PrivateLink Service after blocking or rejecting the connection of the Private Endpoint.

Follow these steps to terminate a PrivateLink Service.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the PrivateLink Service menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Service List page.
  3. Click the resource you want to delete on the PrivateLink Service List page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Service Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete PrivateLink Service button on the PrivateLink Service Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted in the PrivateLink Service List.

Prerequisite Services

These are services that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the previously notified user guide.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in the cloud environment.
NetworkingLoad BalancerService that distributes server traffic load in the cloud environment.
Table. PrivateLink Service Prerequisite Services

1.2.11 - PrivateLink Endpoint

Users can create the PrivateLink Endpoint service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating PrivateLink Endpoint

You can create and use the PrivateLink Endpoint service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a PrivateLink Endpoint.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create PrivateLink Endpoint button on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create PrivateLink Endpoint page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      PrivateLink Endpoint NameRequiredEnter the PrivateLink Endpoint name
      VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect
      • Clicking + Create New allows you to create a VPC and then select it
      Subnet NameRequiredSelect the Subnet of the VPC to connect
      • Clicking + Create New allows you to create a Subnet and then select it
      PrivateLink Endpoint IPRequiredEnter PrivateLink Endpoint IP after selecting the Subnet to connect
      • Cannot enter IPs already in use within the Subnet, cannot use the first/last IP of Subnet IP range
      PrivateLink Endpoint IDRequiredEnter the PrivateLink Service ID to connect
      • Enter within 3 to 60 characters using English letters and numbers
      • Need to verify the Service ID of the PrivateLink Service to connect before service application, must deliver the Endpoint ID to the service provider after Endpoint creation
      Security GroupOptionalClick the Select button to select the Security Group to connect
      • Can select up to 5
      • If Security Group is not selected, all access is blocked
      DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for the PrivateLink Endpoint
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Additional Information Input Items
  3. Review the detailed information and estimated billing cost in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
Note
  • To request a connection to the service provider through PrivateLink, you must go through an approval process.
  • When applying for service connection, you must verify the PrivateLink Service ID that is the connection target in advance.
    • Usage agreement with the service provider must be completed before service application.
  • After the user creates the PrivateLink Endpoint, they must deliver the Endpoint ID to the service provider. The service provider can verify the user’s Endpoint ID and proceed with usage approval quickly.

Viewing PrivateLink Endpoint Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the PrivateLink Endpoint service. The PrivateLink Endpoint Detail page consists of Detail Information, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view PrivateLink Endpoint detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the PrivateLink Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Endpoint Detail page.
    • The PrivateLink Endpoint Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, Connection Management, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      StatusPrivateLink Endpoint status
      • Requesting: Connection request/approval pending, Cancel Request button displayed
      • Active: Creation complete, running
      • Creating: Creating
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Disconnected: Connection blocked
      • Rejected: Connection rejected, Request Approval Again button displayed
      • Error: Error occurred
      • Canceled: Connection request canceled, Request Approval Again button displayed
      Delete PrivateLink EndpointButton to delete PrivateLink Endpoint resource
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NamePrivateLink Endpoint resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the PrivateLink Endpoint
Created AtDate and time when the PrivateLink Endpoint was created
ModifierUser who modified the PrivateLink Endpoint information
Modified AtDate and time when the PrivateLink Endpoint information was modified
PrivateLink Endpoint NamePrivateLink Endpoint resource name
PrivateLink Endpoint IDPrivateLink Endpoint ID information
PrivateLink Service IDConnected PrivateLink Service ID information
PrivateLink Endpoint IPPrivateLink Endpoint IP address
VPC NameConnected VPC information
Subnet NameConnected Subnet information
Port NamePort information of PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Clicking port name allows viewing detailed information
Security GroupConfigured Security Group information
  • Clicking Security Group name allows viewing detailed information
DescriptionDescription of PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Detail Information Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date and time, resource name, task details, task result, task operator information
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Task History Tab Detail Information Items

Deleting PrivateLink Endpoint

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused PrivateLink Endpoints.

Caution
You cannot terminate the service when the PrivateLink Endpoint service status is Requesting, Creating, Deleting.

Follow these steps to terminate a PrivateLink Endpoint.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be navigated to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the PrivateLink Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
  3. Click the resource you want to delete on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page. You will be navigated to the PrivateLink Endpoint Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete PrivateLink Endpoint button on the PrivateLink Endpoint Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted in the PrivateLink Endpoint List.

Prerequisite Services

These are services that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the previously notified user guide.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in the cloud environment.
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint Prerequisite Services

1.2.12 - NAT Logging

To save NAT logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to save the logs, and then set the bucket as the log repository in NAT Logging, after that, by setting log saving in NAT detail inquiry, NAT logs will be saved in the Object Storage bucket.

NAT log saving requires settings in the following order.

  1. To save NAT logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Creating Object Storage.
  2. To set this bucket as the log repository for NAT Logging, refer to Using NAT Logging log repository.
  3. To set the log storage to use in the NAT detailed inquiry, please refer to NAT log storage usage.

NAT Logging Using the log storage

To set the NAT log storage to use, you must first set the log storage setting in NAT Logging.

Reference
NAT Logging To set up a log storage, an Object Storage bucket for log storage is required, please create a bucket in the Object Storage service first. For more detailed information, please refer to Object Storage creation.
  1. All services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu, click. It moves to the NAT Logging list page.
  2. NAT Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top, it moves to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. Log Storage Settings popup window, select the Log Storage Bucket. When you select a bucket, the Log Storage Path will be displayed.
  4. Log Storage Settings popup window, check the Log Storage Bucket and Log Storage Path, then click the Confirm button.
  5. Notification Confirm the message in the popup window, then click the Confirm button.
Notice
NAT Logging After setting the log storage, you must set the log storage to use in the NAT detailed inquiry for the log storage to start. For more detailed information, please refer to Using NAT Log Storage.

NAT Logging list

NAT Logging log storage bucket is set, then the NAT Logging list is retrieved.

  • All services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu is clicked. It moves to the NAT Logging list page.
    Division
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Resource IDRequiredNAT Resource ID
    Save targetRequiredNAT resource name
    Save Registration TimeRequiredNAT Log Storage Registration Time
    Table. NAT Logging list items
Reference
NAT Logging After setting the log storage, you must set the log storage to use in the NAT detailed inquiry for the log storage to start. For more detailed information, please refer to Using NAT Log Storage.

NAT Logging content check

Please refer to the contents below and check the saved Log contents.

Saved log example: 2024-10-11T11:19:03,accept,259,17,192.168.2.173,46937,192.168.0.53,53,100.100.14.52,26937

DivisionDescription
2024-10-11T11:19:03The date and time when the log occurred (2024-10-11, 11:19:03)
acceptaction (deny / accept)
259Log occurrence firewall Rule ID (Policy ID)
17IP Protocol ID
  • 1: ICMP
  • 6: TCP
  • 17: UDP
192.168.2.173source IP
46937Departure Port
192.168.0.53Destination IP
53Destination Port
100.100.14.52NAT translated IP
26937NAT translated Port

NAT Logging do not use log storage

NAT Logging allows you to set the log repository to not be used.

  1. All services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu should be clicked. It moves to the NAT Logging list page.
  2. NAT Logging list page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. It moves to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. Log Storage Settings popup window, select Log Storage Bucket as Not Used, and click the OK button.
Reference
The log repository setting can be changed when there is no log storage target. The log storage bucket change can be changed by selecting and confirming not in use and then resetting it.

1.3 - API Reference

API Reference

1.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

1.5 - Release Note

VPC

2026.03.19
FEATURE VPC New Features Added
  • VPC IP Range Addition Feature
    • You can add and use a new IP range to the VPC.
  • Virtual IP Feature
    • You can reserve and use a Virtual IP in a Subnet.
  • Private NAT Feature Improvement
    • You can now use Private NAT in Transit Gateway as well.
2025.10.23
FEATURE PrivateLink Feature Added
  • You can connect via a private path between the VPC and SCP services without exposing internal Samsung Cloud Platform data to the internet.
2025.07.01
FEATURE New Services Added Beyond Transit Gateway
  • Transit Gateway Feature
    • Easily connects customer networks and Samsung Cloud Platform’s networks and acts as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
  • VPC Peering Feature
    • Allows IP communication via 1:1 private routes between VPCs.
  • Private NAT Feature
    • Compute resources within a VPC can connect by mapping customer network IPs using Direct Connect.
2025.02.27
FEATURE VPC Endpoint Service Added
  • VPC Feature
    • Provides an endpoint (entry point) that allows access to Samsung Cloud Platform through a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • Reflected common CX changes such as Account, IAM, Service Home, and tags.
2024.12.23
FEATURE NAT Log Storage Feature Added
  • Added the ability to store NAT logs.
  • You can decide whether to store NAT logs and store logs in Object Storage.
2024.10.01
NEW VPC Service Official Version Release
  • VPC service providing independent virtual network spaces has been released.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Release
  • VPC service providing independent virtual network spaces has been released.

2 - Security Group

2.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Security Group is a virtual logical firewall that controls Inbound/Outbound traffic occurring in the virtual server of Samsung Cloud Platform. The target resources that can apply Security Group are Virtual Server, Database, Kubernetes Engine, etc. Security Group is applied to the port of the target resource, and multiple Security Groups can be applied according to the characteristics of each resource.

When the Security Group is created for the first time, it blocks all Inbound/Outbound traffic according to the default rules (Any/Deny).

The user can create Inbound/Outbound rules by specifying the IP address, port, and protocol, and only allowed traffic to the target resource is possible according to the created rules.

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Security Group Configuration Diagram

Component

The elements that make up the Security Group are as follows.

ComponentDetailed Description
Applicable TargetThe target resource to which the Security Group is applied
  • Apply Security Group to Virtual Server, Database, Kubernetes Engine, Load Balancer
  • Security Group is applied to the port of the target resource, and multiple Security Groups can be applied according to the characteristics of each resource
Security Group rulesWhen a Security Group is first created, it follows the default rules (Any/Deny) and blocks all Inbound/Outbound traffic
  • Ping, SSH communication between servers in the same subnet is also blocked, and users can use it after setting the necessary rules
  • Inbound/Outbound allowance rules can be added by setting the target address, protocol, and port
  • Block rules cannot be set
  • Bulk creation of rules is provided through form creation
Fig. Security Group Components

Constraints

The Security Group of Samsung Cloud Platform has a default quota (limit) set. There is a maximum number of Security Groups and Security Group rules that can be created. Samsung Cloud Platform Console is a space where you can check and manage quotas for many resources related to Samsung Cloud Platform services and request quota increases.

ClassificationBasic QuotaDetailed Description
Security Group100The default number of Security Groups created per Account
Number of Security Group rules100Default rule creation limit per Security Group
Number of Security Group rules > per project1,000Default number of Security Group rules that can be created per Account
Table. Security Group Restrictions

Preceding Service

Security Group has no preceding service.

2.2 - How-to guides

You can create the Security Group service by entering essential information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Security Group

You can create and use the Security Group service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a Security Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Security Group button. You will be navigated to the Create Security Group page.

    • In the Service Information area, enter the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Security Group NameRequiredSecurity Group name to create
      • Can use uppercase/lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters(-), and can enter up to 255 characters
      • Can use duplicate Security Group names within a project
      Log StorageOptionalSelect whether to store Security Group logs
      • Use: Store logs
      • Do Not Use: Do not store logs
      • Clicking Go to Security Group Logging List navigates to the Security Group Logging list page
      Table. Security Group service information input items
    Note

    To store Security Group logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store logs, and set that bucket in the Security Group Logging’s log storage.

    • You can check the log storage settings in Security Group Logging. For details, refer to Security Group Logging.
    • If you set up log storage, Object Storage charges for log storage will be applied.
    • In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagOptionalAdd tag
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      DescriptionOptionalUser additional description
      • Can enter up to 255 characters
      Table. Security Group additional information input items
  3. Review the entered information and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Security Group List page.

Viewing Security Group Detailed Information

On the Security Group List page of the Security Group menu, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information.

Follow these steps to view detailed information of the Security Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.
    • The Security Group Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Rules, Tags, Task History tabs.
ItemDetailed Description
Service StatusStatus of Security Group
  • Creating: Creating
  • Active: Normally operating
  • Editing: Changing settings
  • Deploying: Deployment complete
  • Deleting: Terminating
  • Error: Error occurred
Service TerminationButton to terminate the service
Table. Security Group status information and additional features

Detailed Information

You can view detailed information of the resource selected from the Security Group List and modify information if necessary.

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate when the service information was modified
Security Group NameResource name
Security Group IDUnique resource ID in the service
Security Group Rule CountRule quota for the Security Group and number of rules in use
Security Group Rule Count/AccountSecurity Group rule quota for the Account and sum of rules in use in all Security Groups of the Account
DescriptionAdditional description written by the user
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Log StorageWhether to store Security Group logs
  • Use: Store logs
  • Do Not Use: Do not store logs
  • Can modify settings by clicking the Edit icon
Applied ServicesService type, service name, and status value of services where the Security Group is applied
Table. Security Group detailed information tab items

Rules

You can view the rule list of the resource selected from the Security Group List page and add or delete rules.

ItemDetailed Description
Excel DownloadDownload button for rule batch input Excel file
MoreAdditional feature button
  • Batch Rule Input: Upload Excel file for batch rule input
  • Delete: Delete selected rules
Advanced SearchRule advanced search button
Add RuleAdd rule button
DirectionTraffic access direction based on the server where Security Group is applied
  • Inbound: External → Server
  • Outbound: Server → External
Rule IDUnique ID value for the rule
Destination AddressDestination address to communicate with the server where Security Group is applied
Remote Security Group NameSecurity Group resource name displayed when specifying the destination as a Security Group
Remote Security Group IDSecurity Group ID displayed when specifying the destination as a Security Group
ServiceProtocol and port
DescriptionAdditional description written by the user
DeleteDelete rule
Table. Security Group rules tab items

Tags

You can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the resource selected from the Security Group List page.

ItemDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view Key, Value information of the tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Security Group tags tab items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected from the Security Group List page.

ItemDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date, resource name, task details, task result, task user information
Table. Task history tab items

Managing Security Group Resources

You can manage Security Group resources such as log storage settings, adding rules, etc.

Using Log Storage

Note

To store Security Group logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store logs, and set that bucket in the Security Group Logging’s log storage.

  • You can check the log storage settings in Security Group Logging. For details, refer to Security Group Logging.
  • If you set up log storage, Object Storage charges for log storage will be applied.

Follow these steps to store Security Group logs:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to store logs. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.
  4. Click the Edit icon on Log Storage. You will be navigated to the Modify Log Storage popup window.
  5. In the Modify Log Storage popup window, select Use for log storage and click the OK button.
Caution
If the log storage is not set up in Security Group Logging, you cannot set log storage to Use.

Setting Log Storage to Do Not Use

Follow these steps to stop storing Security Group logs:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to not store logs. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.
  4. Click the Edit icon on Log Storage. You will be navigated to the Modify Log Storage popup window.
  5. In the Modify Log Storage popup window, deselect Use for log storage and click the OK button.
  6. Review the message in the Notification popup window and click the OK button.
Caution
If you disable log storage, log storage for that service will stop, and you cannot track and manage through log analysis in case of a security incident.

Adding a Rule

Follow these steps to add a Security Group rule:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.

  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to add a rule. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.

  4. On the Security Group Detail page, click the Rules tab. You will be navigated to the Rules tab page.

  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will be navigated to the Add Rule popup window.

    Item
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Destination Input MethodRequiredSet rule remote type
    • CIDR: Set destination address by entering IP directly
    • Security Group: Set created Security Group as destination
    Remote > Destination AddressRequiredWhen CIDR is selected, need to enter destination IP address
    • Enter in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format
      • Can enter multiple addresses up to 100 at once using , and -.
      • To use the entire IP range (ANY), enter ‘0.0.0.0/0’
    Remote > Security GroupRequiredWhen Security Group is selected, need to select Security Group
    TypeRequiredSelect protocol type to apply the rule
    • Select Destination Port/Type: Select protocol type
    • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol number, can enter up to 100
    • All: Select destination port/Type and protocol as full range, means all ports for all protocols
    Type > ProtocolRequiredSelect detailed protocol for type
    • Select desired protocol from TCP, UDP, ICMP, input items vary depending on the selected protocol
    • When selecting ICMP in protocol, can set ICMP Type
      • Select frequently used Type items such as Echo from values defined in ICMP Type
      • Click the Add button to add input value
    • When selecting TCP/UDP in protocol, can select allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP
      • When entering directly, can enter values 1 ~ 65,535, and can enter up to 100 at once using Comma(,), range(-)
      • Click the Add button to add input value
    • When selecting Internet Protocol in type, enter protocol number within 1 ~ 254
    DirectionRequiredSet traffic access direction based on the application target
    • Inbound Rule: External → Server
    • Outbound Rule: Server → External
    DescriptionOptionalAdditional description written by the user
    Table. Security Group rule addition detailed items
  6. Review the rule to add and click the OK button.

Batch Creating Rules

Follow these steps to add multiple Security Group rules at once:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to add rules. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.
  4. On the Security Group Detail page, click the Rules tab. You will be navigated to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Excel Download button. The rule batch input Excel file will be downloaded.
  6. Enter rule information in the rule batch input Excel file and save it.
  7. Click the More > Batch Rule Input button. The Batch Rule Input popup window will open.
  8. In the Batch Rule Input popup window, click Attach File to attach the created Excel file and click Upload File.
    • If the attached Excel file format differs from the registration form or the file is encrypted, it cannot be uploaded.
    • The maximum number of batch registration rules that can be uploaded at once is 100. If the maximum registration rule count is exceeded, it cannot be uploaded.
    • If the maximum number of rules that can be registered in the Account is exceeded, the file cannot be uploaded.
  9. Review the details in the Rule Confirmation popup window and click the OK button.

Deleting a Rule

Follow these steps to delete a Security Group rule:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to add a rule. You will be navigated to the Security Group Detail page.
  4. On the Security Group Detail page, click the Rules tab. You will be navigated to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Delete button of the rule to delete.

Terminating Security Group

You can delete a Security Group that is not in use.

Caution
If there are resources connected to the Security Group, you cannot terminate the Security Group service. Delete all connected resources and then terminate the service.

Follow these steps to terminate the Security Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be navigated to the Security Group List page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, select the resource (Security Group name) to terminate the service and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. When termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the Security Group List page.

2.2.1 - Security Group Logging

To store Security Group logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store the logs and then set the bucket as the log storage for Security Group Logging. After that, you can enable log storage in the Security Group details, and Security Group logs will start being stored in the Object Storage bucket.

To store Security Group logs, you need to follow these steps:

  1. You can create a new bucket in Object Storage for storing Security Group logs or use an existing bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Creating Object Storage.
  2. To set the bucket as the log storage for Security Group Logging, refer to Using Security Group Logging Log Storage.
  3. To enable log storage in the Security Group details, refer to Enabling Security Group Log Storage.

Using Security Group Logging Log Storage

To enable Security Group log storage, you must first set up the log storage in Security Group Logging.

Note
To set up Security Group Logging log storage, you need an Object Storage bucket for log storage. First, create a bucket in the Object Storage service. For more information, refer to Creating Object Storage.
  1. Click All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging. You will be taken to the Security Group Logging List page.
  2. On the Security Group Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, select the Log Storage Bucket. After selecting the bucket, the Log Storage Path will be displayed.
  4. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, confirm the Log Storage Bucket and Log Storage Path, and then click the Confirm button.
  5. Confirm the message in the Notification popup window and click the Confirm button.
Guide
After setting up Security Group Logging log storage, you must enable log storage in the Security Group details for log storage to start. For more information, refer to Enabling Security Group Log Storage.

Security Group Logging List

After setting up the Security Group Logging log storage bucket, you can view the Security Group Logging list.

  1. Click All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging. You will be taken to the Security Group Logging List page.
    Category
    Required
    Description
    Resource IDRequiredSecurity Group ID
    Storage TargetRequiredSecurity Group Name
    Storage Registration DateRequiredSecurity Group Log Storage Registration Date
    Table. Security Group Logging List Items
Note
After setting up Security Group Logging log storage, you must enable log storage in the Security Group details for log storage to start. For more information, refer to Enabling Security Group Log Storage.

Checking Security Group Logging Content

Refer to the following content to check the stored log content.

  1. TCP / UDP

Example of stored log: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,drop,to-lport: tcp,198.19.65.2,6443,192.168.22.131,20427

CategoryDescription
2024-10-11T02:18:39Date and time when the log occurred (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
dropAction (drop / allow)
to-lportDirection
  • to-lport: inbound
  • from-lport: outbound
tcpProtocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip)
192.168.65.2Source IP
6443Source Port
192.168.22.131Destination IP
20427Destination Port
  1. ICMP

Example of stored log: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,allow,to-lport: icmp,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,8

CategoryDescription
2024-10-11T02:18:39Date and time when the log occurred (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
to-lportDirection
  • to-lport: inbound
  • from-lport: outbound
allowAction (drop / allow)
icmpProtocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip)
192.168.65.2Source IP
192.168.22.131Destination IP
8ICMP Type ID
  1. IP

Example of stored log: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,deny,ip,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,103

CategoryDescription
2024-10-11T02:18:39Date and time when the log occurred (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
denyAction (drop / allow)
ipProtocol
192.168.65.2Source IP
192.168.22.131Destination IP
103IP Protocol ID
  • 1: ICMP
  • 6: TCP
  • 17: UDP
–>

Disabling Security Group Logging Log Storage

You can disable Security Group Logging log storage.

  1. Click All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging. You will be taken to the Security Group Logging List page.
  2. On the Security Group Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, select Do not use for the Log Storage Bucket, and then click the Confirm button.
Note
Log storage settings can be changed only when there is no log storage target. To change the log storage bucket, select Do not use, confirm, and then set it again.

2.3 - API Reference

API Reference

2.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

2.5 - Release Note

Security Group

2026.03.19
FEATURE Security Group Feature Improvement
  • Can select multiple service ports when adding Security Group rules
    • Improved to allow selecting multiple service ports when adding rules in the Console.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Security Group Rule Input Method Addition
  • Security Group rule input method added
    • Added the ability to enter IP protocol.
    • Added the ability to select well-known protocols.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Common Feature Changes
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Reflected common CX changes such as Account, IAM and Service Home, and tags.
2025.02.27
CHANGED Security Group Feature Improvement
  • Improved to allow entering multiple IPs when adding Security Group rules.
2024.12.23
FEATURE Security Group Log Storage Feature Added
  • Added the ability to store Security Group logs.
  • Can determine whether to store Security Group logs and store logs in Object Storage.
2024.10.01
NEW Security Group Service Official Version Release
  • Released the Security Group service that provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources.
  • Can control inbound and outbound traffic occurring in instance resources through the Security Group service.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Release
  • Released the Security Group service that provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources.
  • Can control inbound and outbound traffic occurring in instance resources through the Security Group service.

3 - Load Balancer

3.1 - Overview

Service Overview

The Load Balancer (LB) service of Samsung Cloud Platform automatically distributes traffic to available servers when traffic increases unpredictably or server failures occur, ensuring the stability and continuity of customer services.

The Load Balancer is deployed in the VPC Subnet according to the service type (L4 / L7) as a service access point provided to clients, and multiple services can be configured by adding Listeners to the created Load Balancer.

The Listener receives client requests through the service port and processes traffic according to routing rules. L4 supports TCP / UDP / TLS protocols, and L7 supports HTTP / HTTPS protocols. In L7, you can specify LB server groups according to routing conditions or set redirect responses for request URLs.

The LB server group delivers requests received by the Listener to specific servers according to load balancing and health checks. Servers receive client requests from the Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP through the port set on the member, and the server status is periodically monitored by the Load Balancer’s health check IP.

The LB health check defines the member health check method registered in the LB server group. You can select the LB health check resource provided by default in the LB server group, or create a new one to configure monitoring suitable for your application.

Features

  • Various Load Balancing Methods: Provides various load balancing methods such as Round Robin, Least Connection, and IP Hash.
  • SSL Certificate Encryption and Offloading: Supports SSL offloading and allows selection of encryption levels.
  • Enhanced Security: Manage Load Balancer communication using Firewall and view access logs through log storage.

Service Configuration Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Load Balancer Configuration Diagram

Provided Functions

  • Load Balancer: Select the service type and set the IP to use in the Load Balancer.
  • Listener: Set the protocol, port, and routing rules. You can add multiple Listeners to a single Load Balancer.
  • LB Server Group: Set the load balancing method. The LB server group can be connected to a single Load Balancer.
  • Member: Select the server to add to the LB server group. You can select Virtual Server and Bare Metal Server resources created in the same VPC as the Load Balancer, or directly enter an IP.
  • LB Health Check: Set the member health check method. The LB health check can be registered and used in multiple LB server groups.

Components

The Load Balancer consists of Load Balancer (Listener), LB server group (member), and LB health check.

Load Balancer

The components that make up the Load Balancer are as follows. According to the settings for each component, you can configure load balancing suitable for customer workloads.

ComponentDescription
Service TypeLoad Balancer service type
  • Listener protocol distinction according to L4 / L7
Service SubnetVPC Subnet where the Load Balancer will be deployed
  • Allocate Service IP, Source NAT IP, and Health Check IP required for Load Balancer in the Subnet range
Service IPService IP that clients access
Source NAT IPIP used by Load Balancer to deliver server traffic
Health Check IPIP used by Load Balancer for health checks
ListenerResources connected to Load Balancer
  • Set protocol, port, and LB server group
Table. Load Balancer Components

LB Server Group

The components that make up the LB server group are as follows. According to the settings for each component, traffic is delivered to members of the LB server group.

ComponentDescription
ProtocolLB server group delivery protocol
Load BalancingTraffic distribution method
  • Deliver traffic to specific members according to load balancing method
LB Health CheckMember health check method
  • Select from the list of resources created in LB health check
MemberServer that processes client requests
  • Set weight according to load balancing or modify activation status
Table. LB Server Group Components

LB Health Check

The components that make up the LB health check are as follows. According to the settings for each component, member health checks are performed.

ComponentDescription
ProtocolHealth check protocol
Health Check PortPort used for health check
IntervalHealth check execution interval
TimeoutServer response wait time for health check
Detection CountCriteria for determining member health check status (Healthy / Unhealthy)
Table. LB Health Check Components

Constraints

Samsung Cloud Platform’s Load Balancer applies basic quotas, so there are constraints on the number of Load Balancers, Listeners, LB server groups, and members that can be created. You can manage current usage through the Console and request additional quotas for items that can be expanded.

ItemBasic QuotaDescription
LOAD_BALANCER.SERVICE_SUBNET.DEFAULT.COUNT3Number of Service Subnets where Load Balancers can be created per VPC
LOAD_BALANCER.DEFAULT.COUNT50Number of Load Balancers created per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.LISTENER.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of Listeners created per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.SERVER_GROUP.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of LB server groups created per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.MEMBER.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of members that can be registered in all LB server groups per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.HEALTH_CHECK.DEFAULT.COUNT500Number of LB health checks created per Region
Table. Load Balancer Constraints

Prerequisite Services

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the Load Balancer service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
Table. Load Balancer Prerequisite Services

3.2 - How-to guides

You can create a Load Balancer service by entering essential information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Load Balancer

You can create and use a Load Balancer service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to create a Load Balancer:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Load Balancer button. You will be navigated to the Create Load Balancer page.
  3. On the Create Load Balancer page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • In the Service Information area, enter or select the required information.

Item
Required
Detailed Description
Load Balancer NameRequiredLoad Balancer resource name
  • Enter 3 to 63 characters using uppercase/lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters(-_)
Service TypeRequiredLoad Balancer service type
  • Select L4 or L7
VPC NameRequiredVPC where the Load Balancer will be created
  • Select from the VPC list
  • If you select + Create New, you can create and then select
Service Subnet NameRequiredVPC Subnet where the Load Balancer will be created
  • Select from the list of Subnets created in the selected VPC
  • If you select + Create New, you can create and then select
Service IPOptionalService IP of the Load Balancer
  • Enter 1 IP in the Service Subnet range in IP address format
  • If not entered, automatically assigned from the IP allocation range of the selected Subnet
Public NAT IPOptionalPublic NAT IP to use in the Load Balancer when allowing service access from external (internet)
  • Can set to Use when selecting a VPC and Service Subnet or when an Internet Gateway is connected to the selected VPC
  • Select from the list of Public IPs created in the selected VPC
  • If you select + Create New, you can create and then select
Source NAT IPOptionalIP to use for member communication in the Load Balancer
  • Enter 1 IP in the Service Subnet range in IP address format
  • If not entered, automatically assigned from the IP allocation range of the selected Subnet
  • If a Load Balancer already created exists in the selected Subnet, the previously assigned IP information is displayed
  • Cannot modify IP after creating Load Balancer
Health Check IPOptionalIP to use for health check in the Load Balancer
  • Enter 2 IPs in the Service Subnet range in IP address format respectively
  • If not entered, automatically assigned from the IP allocation range of the selected Subnet (if only 1 IP is entered, the remaining 1 IP is automatically assigned)
  • If a Load Balancer already created exists in the selected Subnet, the previously assigned IP information is displayed
  • Cannot modify IP after creating Load Balancer
Use FirewallOptionalSet whether to use Firewall
  • Select whether to activate Firewall for Load Balancer access control
    • If set to Use, Firewall resource is created
    • If not checked, Firewall resource is created in unused state
  • If a Firewall already in use exists in the selected Subnet, the Firewall resource information is displayed
Save Firewall LogOptionalSelect whether to save Firewall log
Table. Load Balancer service information input items
* In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
Item
Required
Detailed Description
DescriptionOptionalEnter resource description
TagOptionalAdd tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
Table. Load Balancer additional information input items

  1. Review the created service information and estimated charges, then click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Load Balancer List page.
      Notice
      • The Load Balancer service does not provide access control functionality for Service IP and service ports.
        • When creating a Load Balancer, we recommend selecting Use Firewall to manage communication between client and Load Balancer, and between Load Balancer and members using Firewall rules, and using Save Firewall Log to store access logs.
      • If you set the Firewall log storage feature when creating a service, you must set up the log storage first. If the log storage setup is not complete, you cannot create the Load Balancer service.
      Caution

      If using Firewall, you must add rules required for Load Balancer communication. Pay attention to the direction for each purpose when registering rules.

      • If you do not add rules, the Load Balancer service will not function properly.
      Diagram
      PurposeSource IPDestination IPProtocolDestination Port/TypeDirection
      Client → LB ConnectionClient IPLB Service IPListener ProtocolListener Service PortOutbound
      LB → Member ConnectionLB Source NAT IPLB Server Group Member IPLB Server Group ProtocolMember PortInbound
      LB → Member Health CheckLB Health Check IPLB Server Group Member IPHealth Check ProtocolHealth Check Port
      • If health check port and member port are different, register member port
      Inbound
      Figure and Table. Adding Load Balancer Firewall Rules

Viewing Load Balancer Detailed Information

For Load Balancer services, you can view and modify resource lists and detailed information from the Load Balancer menu. The Load Balancer Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Tags, and Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view detailed information about the Load Balancer service:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
    • The Load Balancer Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Tags, Task History tabs.
      ItemDetailed Description
      StatusLoad Balancer resource status
      • Active: Service is normally activated
      • Deleting: Processing service termination request
      • Creating: Processing service creation request
      • Error: Cannot check current status due to internal error
      • Editing: Processing service modification request
      Service TerminationDelete Load Balancer resource
      Table. Load Balancer status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

On the Detailed Information tab, you can view and modify the detailed information of the resource selected from the Load Balancer List, and modify necessary information.

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
Creation DateService creation date
Modification DateService modification date
CreatorUser who requested service creation
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Load Balancer NameLoad Balancer name
Service IPLoad Balancer’s Service IP (used during communication between client and Load Balancer)
  • Uses 1 IP from Service Subnet
Service TypeLoad Balancer service type
Source NAT IPLoad Balancer’s Source NAT IP (used during communication between Load Balancer and server)
  • Uses 1 IP from Service Subnet
VPC NameVPC resource name where the Load Balancer is created
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Service Subnet NameSubnet resource name where the Load Balancer is created
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Public NAT IPLoad Balancer’s Public NAT IP (used when configuring internet service)
  • Can modify settings by clicking the Edit icon
Private NAT IPLoad Balancer’s Private NAT IP
  • Can modify settings by clicking the Edit icon
Health Check IPLoad Balancer Health Check IP (used when checking health of LB server group members)
  • Uses 2 IPs from Service Subnet
DescriptionAdditional information or description about the Load Balancer
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Firewall NameFirewall resource name connected to the Load Balancer
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Table. Load Balancer detailed information tab items

Connected Resources

On the Connected Resources tab, you can view the list of Listeners connected to the Load Balancer, and create or terminate Listeners.

  • By selecting a Listener item on the Connected Resources tab, you can navigate to the Listener Detail page to view detailed information and modify or delete it.
  • By clicking the Edit icon on the Listener Detail page items, you can modify the information.
ItemDetailed Description
Create ListenerCreate Listener button
Listener NameListener resource name
Routing RulesRouting rules connected to the Listener
  • Routing Action: Traffic routing method
  • Setting Value: Setting value for routing action
ProtocolProtocol to which the Listener will listen
PortPort to which the Listener will listen
Creation DateListener creation date
DeleteDelete Listener button
Table. Load Balancer connected resources list items

Tags

You can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the resource selected from the Load Balancer List page.

ItemDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view Key, Value information of the tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Load Balancer tags tab items

Task History

On the Task History tab, you can view the task history of the selected resource.

ItemDetailed Description
Task DetailsTask execution content
Task DateTask execution date
Resource TypeResource type
Resource NameLoad Balancer name
Task ResultTask execution result (Success/Failure)
Task User InformationUser information who performed the task
Table. Load Balancer task history list items

Managing Load Balancer Resources

You can manage Load Balancer resources such as creating and deleting Listeners.

Creating a Listener

Create a Listener on the Load Balancer to receive client requests and process traffic according to Listener settings.

Notice

The protocol for receiving client requests varies depending on the Load Balancer service type.

  • For L4 Load Balancer: TLS, TCP, UDP protocols
  • For L7 Load Balancer: HTTP, HTTPS protocols

Creating a Listener in L4 Load Balancer

Follow these steps to create a Listener in an L4 Load Balancer:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource where you want to create a Listener. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right corner.
  6. In the Service Information area, enter or select the required information.
    • The information you can enter varies depending on the Protocol.
Item
Required
Detailed Description
Load BalancerRequiredLoad Balancer resource name where the Listener will be created
Listener NameRequiredListener resource name
ProtocolRequiredSelect Listener listening protocol
  • Select from TCP, UDP, TLS, TCP_Proxy
Service PortRequiredEnter Listener listening port
  • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
Routing RulesRequiredSet routing rules
  • Routing Action: Fixed to LB Server Group Forward for L4 Load Balancer
  • LB Server Group: Select LB Server Group to process client requests
    • Can select from LB Server Groups created in the same Service Subnet as the Load Balancer
    • Cannot select LB Server Groups already in use by other Load Balancers
Session Persistence TimeRequiredSet client session persistence time
  • Default value 120 seconds
  • When using TCP, TLS protocol, can enter in 60-second increments between 60 and 3,600 seconds
  • When using UDP protocol, can enter in 60-second increments between 60 and 180 seconds
Proxy ProtocolOptionalSet whether to add client IP information to proxy protocol header (when using TCP protocol)
  • Insert client IP address into TCP proxy protocol header and forward to server (supports proxy protocol v1)
PersistenceRequiredSelect session persistence (Sticky Session) method (when using TCP, TLS protocol)
  • Source IP: Fix connection server based on client IP address
SSL CertificateOptionalSelect default encryption certificate and security level (when using TLS protocol)
  • Select certificate to use for SSL/TLS Handshake with client
    • Default Certificate (Required): Select certificate to use for client connection
    • SSL Security Level (Required): Select security level when encrypting client connection (refer to Supported Items by SSL Security Level)
      • High: Support Cipher Suites of TLS 1.3 version
      • Normal: Support Cipher Suites including TLS 1.2 version
      • Low (Not recommended): Support Cipher Suites including TLS 1.1 version
Server SSL Security LevelRequiredSelect security level when configuring End-to-End SSL (when using TLS protocol)
  • If not encrypting server connection, select Do Not Use
Table. Listener service information input - When using L4 Load Balancer
  1. In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
Item
Required
Detailed Description
DescriptionOptionalEnter resource description
TagOptionalAdd tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
Table. Listener additional information input items
  1. Review the created service information and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Connected Resources tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.

Creating a Listener in L7 Load Balancer

Follow these steps to create a Listener in an L7 Load Balancer:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource where you want to create a Listener. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right corner.
  6. In the Service Information area, enter or select the required information.
    • The information you can enter varies depending on the Protocol.
Item
Required
Detailed Description
Load BalancerRequiredLoad Balancer resource name where the Listener is created
Listener NameRequiredListener resource name
ProtocolRequiredSelect Listener listening protocol
  • Select from HTTP, HTTPS
Service PortRequiredEnter Listener listening port
  • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
Routing Rules > Routing ActionRequiredSelect routing processing method
  • LB Server Group Forward: Forward traffic to LB Server Group
  • URL Redirection: Load Balancer responds with redirection
Routing Rules > Routing ConditionRequiredWhen routing action is LB Server Group Forward, set LB Server Group by routing condition
  • URL Path: Set LB Server Group by URL path
  • Host Header: Set LB Server Group based on Host value
  • Redirection Target: When routing action is URL Redirection, set redirection response
    • Change URL Path: Enter URL path to redirect
    • Change Host: Enter Host value to redirect
    • Protocol/Port: Set protocol and port to redirect (when using HTTP protocol)
PersistenceOptionalSelect session persistence (Sticky Session) method (when routing action is LB Server Group Forward)
  • Source IP: Fix connection server based on client IP address
  • Cookie: Fix connection server based on cookie first inserted by Load Balancer
Listener timeout settings > Session Persistence TimeOptionalSet HTTP connection persistence time
  • When Use, can enter between 60 and 3,600 seconds
  • Cannot change Use → Not Use, so recommend using only for necessary services
Listener timeout settings > HTTP Connection TimeoutOptionalSet HTTP response timeout time
  • When each item of Use client connection persistence time, server response wait time, response timeout, can enter between 1 and 120 seconds
  • Cannot change Use → Not Use, so recommend using only for necessary services
X-Forwarded-ForOptionalSet whether to insert client IP information
  • When used, add client IP address to X-Forwarded-For header
X-Forwarded-ProtoOptionalSet whether to insert client request protocol information
  • When used, add client request protocol to X-Forwarded-Proto header
X-Forwarded-PortOptionalSet whether to insert client request port information
  • When used, add client request port to X-Forwarded-Port header
HTTP 2.0OptionalSet whether to use HTTP/2 when connecting client and server
SSL CertificateOptionalSelect encryption certificate and security level (when using HTTPS protocol)
  • Select certificate to use for SSL/TLS Handshake with client
    • Default Certificate (Required): Select certificate to use for client connection
    • SSL Security Level (Required): Select security level when encrypting client connection (refer to Supported Items by SSL Security Level)
      • High: Support Cipher Suites of TLS 1.3 version
      • Normal: Support Cipher Suites including TLS 1.2 version
      • Low (Not recommended): Support Cipher Suites including TLS 1.1 version
  • If multi-domain service, add and register certificate to SNI Certificate after creating Listener
Server SSL Security LevelRequiredSelect security level when configuring End-to-End SSL (when using HTTPS protocol)
  • If not encrypting server connection, select Do Not Use
Table. Listener service information input - When using L7 Load Balancer
Note

The URL path matching method for routing rules is Starts with (prefix match).

  • Checks whether the entered URL path starts with a specific string, and if the beginning matches, the routing rule is applied.
  • Example: If the entered URL is /api/
    • Matching URLs: /api/users, /api/v1/login, /api/images/logo.png
    • Non-matching URLs: /auth/api/, /API/users
  1. In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
Item
Required
Detailed Description
DescriptionOptionalEnter resource description
TagOptionalAdd tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
Table. Listener additional information input items
  1. Review the created service information and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Connected Resources tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.

Supported Items by SSL Security Level

The list of TLS versions and Cipher Suites supported by SSL security level in the Listener is as follows.

Security LevelTLS VersionCipher Suite (Encryption Algorithm)
HighTLS 1.3TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
Normal/LowNormal: TLS 1.3, 1.2
Low: TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1
TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
RC4-MD5
RC4-SHA
DES-CBC3-SHA
DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
DHE-RSA-CHACHA20-PLY1305
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY135
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
ECDHE-ECDSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305
Table. Supported items by SSL security level

Viewing Listener Detailed Information

You can view and modify detailed information of a Listener by selecting it from the Connected Resources tab on the Load Balancer Detail page.

Follow these steps to view detailed information of the Listener:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab.
  5. From the connected resources list, click the Listener for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the Listener Detail page.
    • The Listener Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Task History tabs.
ItemDetailed Description
StatusListener status
  • Active: Service is normally activated
  • Deleting: Processing service termination request
  • Creating: Processing service creation request
  • Error: Cannot check current status due to internal error
  • Editing: Processing service modification request
Delete ListenerDelete Listener
Table. Listener status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

On the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the Listener and modify necessary information. The detailed information varies depending on the Load Balancer in use.

L4 Load Balancer Detailed Information

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who requested Listener creation
Creation DateListener creation date
ModifierUser who requested Listener modification
Modification DateListener modification date
Listener NameListener name
ProtocolProtocol used by Listener
PortPort used by Listener
Session Persistence TimeClient session persistence time
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Proxy ProtocolWhether to insert client IP information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
PersistenceWhether to use session persistence (Sticky Session)
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Routing RulesRouting action and LB Server Group information
  • Can modify LB Server Group by clicking the Edit icon
SSL CertificateDefault certificate, SSL security level, and expiration date information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
  • If registered SNI certificates exist, cannot modify default certificate (can modify after deleting SNI certificates)
SNI CertificateSNI certificate detailed information
  • Can modify referenced SNI information and add register certificates by clicking the Edit icon
Server SSL Security LevelWhether to encrypt server connection
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
DescriptionAdditional information about the Listener
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Table. Listener detailed information tab - When using L4 Load Balancer

L7 Load Balancer Detailed Information

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who requested Listener creation
Creation DateListener creation date
ModifierUser who requested Listener modification
Modification DateListener modification date
Listener NameListener name
ProtocolProtocol used by Listener
PortPort used by Listener
Session Persistence TimeHTTP connection persistence time
  • Can modify Not Use → Use and modify input value by clicking the Edit icon
Client Connection Persistence TimeHTTP client connection persistence timeout
  • Can modify Not Use → Use and modify input value by clicking the Edit icon
Server Response Wait TimeHTTP server response wait timeout
  • Can modify Not Use → Use and modify input value by clicking the Edit icon
X-Forwarded-ForWhether to insert client IP information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
X-Forwarded-ProtoWhether to insert client request protocol information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
X-Forwarded-PortWhether to insert client request port information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
PersistenceWhether to use session persistence (Sticky Session)
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
HTTP 2.0Whether to use HTTP/2 when connecting client and server
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Routing RulesRouting action and routing condition/redirection target information
  • Can modify Routing Condition or Redirection Target by clicking the Edit icon
SSL CertificateDefault certificate, SSL security level, and expiration date information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
  • If registered SNI certificates exist, cannot modify default certificate (can modify after deleting SNI certificates)
SNI CertificateSNI certificate detailed information
  • Can modify referenced SNI information and add register certificates by clicking the Edit icon
Server SSL Security LevelWhether to encrypt server connection
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
DescriptionAdditional information about the Listener
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Table. Listener detailed information tab - When using L7 Load Balancer

Tags

You can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the Listener.

ItemDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view Key, Value information of the tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Listener tags tab items

Task History

You can view the task history of the Listener.

ItemDetailed Description
Task DetailsTask execution content
Task DateTask execution date
Resource TypeResource type
Resource NameListener name
Task ResultTask execution result (Success/Failure)
Task User InformationUser information who performed the task
Table. Listener task history tab items

Modifying Routing Rules

You can modify routing rules of a Listener from the Connected Resources tab on the Load Balancer Detail page.

Follow these steps to modify routing rules of the Listener:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab.
  5. From the connected resources list, click the Listener for which you want to add routing conditions. You will be navigated to the Listener Detail page.
  6. On the Listener Detail page, click the Edit icon on the Routing Rules item. The Modify Routing Rules popup window will open.
  7. Modify routing rules according to the routing action, then click the OK button.
    Item
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Routing Action-Currently set routing method (cannot modify)
    Routing ConditionRequiredCan modify routing conditions when routing action is LB Server Group Forward
    • URL Path: Modify request URL path and LB Server Group (can add up to 20)
    • Host Header: Modify request host and LB Server Group (can add up to 20)
    Redirection TargetRequiredCan modify redirection target when routing action is URL Redirection
    • Path: Can modify change URL path
    • Host: Can modify change host
    • Protocol/Port: Cannot modify (only HTTP → HTTPS redirection possible)
    Table. Listener routing rule modification items

Deleting a Listener

Follow these steps to delete a Listener that is not in use:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource from which you want to delete a Listener. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Listener you want to delete. You will be navigated to the Listener Detail page.
  6. On the Listener Detail page, click the Delete Listener button.

Terminating Load Balancer

You can terminate a Load Balancer that is not in use to reduce costs. However, since it may affect application services, request termination after sufficient prior review.

Caution

You cannot terminate a Load Balancer in the following cases:

  • If there are Listeners connected to the Load Balancer: Delete the connected Listeners on the Connected Resources tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.
  • If using Public NAT IP on the Load Balancer: Release the Public NAT IP in use on the Detailed Information tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.
  • If using Private NAT IP on the Load Balancer: Release the Private NAT IP in use on the Detailed Information tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.
  • If there are rules registered in the Firewall: Delete the rules of the Firewall in use on the Detailed Information tab of the Load Balancer Detail page.
  • If connected to PrivateLink Service: Check the connected Load Balancer on the PrivateLink Service Detail page.

Follow these steps to terminate a Load Balancer:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource you want to terminate. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer Detail page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Detail page, click the Terminate Service button.
  5. When termination is complete, verify resource termination on the Load Balancer List.

3.2.1 - LB Server Group

You can create an LB Server Group through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and connect it to a Load Balancer’s Listener.

Creating LB Server Group

Note
You can create up to 1,000 LB Server Groups per Account.

Follow these steps to create an LB Server Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.
  3. On the LB Server Group List page, click the Create LB Server Group button. You will be navigated to the Create LB Server Group page.
  4. On the Create LB Server Group page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • In the Service Information area, enter or select the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      LB Server Group NameRequiredLB Server Group resource name
      • Enter 3 to 63 characters using uppercase/lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters(-_)
      • LB Server Group name cannot be duplicated within an Account
      VPC NameRequiredSelect VPC to create LB Server Group
      • Select VPC where the Load Balancer to which the LB Server Group will be connected is created
      Service Subnet NameRequiredSelect VPC Subnet to create LB Server Group
      • Select Subnet where the Load Balancer to which the LB Server Group will be connected is created
      Load BalancingRequiredSelect load balancing algorithm
      • Round Robin: Distribute sequentially to registered members
      • Weighted round robin: Distribute sequentially in proportion to the weight assigned to each member
      • Least Connection: Distribute to the member with the fewest connections
      • Weighted least connection: Distribute to the member with the highest priority considering the weight assigned to each member and the number of connections
      • IP Hash: Distribute to a specific member according to the client IP address hash value
      ProtocolRequiredSelect LB Server Group listening protocol
      • Select protocol to forward to members of LB Server Group
      LB Health CheckRequiredSelect LB Health Check
      • Select from LB Health Checks created in the same Service Subnet as the LB Server Group
      Table. LB Server Group service information input items
    • In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter resource description
      TagOptionalAdd tag
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      Table. LB Server Group additional information input items
  5. Review the created service information and estimated charges, then click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the LB Server Group List page.

Viewing LB Server Group Detailed Information

You can view and modify resource lists and detailed information from the LB Server Group menu. The LB Server Group Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Tags, and Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view detailed information of the LB Server Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.

    • You can modify column display by clicking the Settings button in the upper right of the table.
      Item
      Display
      Detailed Description
      LB Server Group NameDefaultLB Server Group resource name
      ProtocolDefaultLB Server Group protocol
      Load Balancer NameDefaultLoad Balancer resource name connected to LB Server Group
      LB Health Check IDDefaultLB Health Check resource name used by LB Server Group
      Member CountDefaultNumber of members registered in LB Server Group
      Creation DateDefaultLB Server Group creation date
      StatusDefaultLB Server Group resource status
      Table. LB Server Group list items
  3. On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group Detail page.

    • At the top of the LB Server Group Detail page, status information and description of additional features are displayed.
      ItemDetailed Description
      StatusLB Server Group resource status
      • Active: Service is normally activated
      • Deleting: Processing service termination request
      • Creating: Processing service creation request
      • Error: Cannot check current status due to internal error
        • If this status persists, contact Support Center
      • Editing: Processing service modification request
      Delete LB Server GroupDelete LB Server Group resource
      Table. LB Server Group status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

On the Detailed Information tab, you can view detailed information of the resource from the LB Server Group List and modify information if necessary.

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who requested service creation
Creation DateService creation date
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Modification DateService modification date
Load Balancer NameLoad Balancer resource name connected to LB Server Group
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
LB Server Group NameLB Server Group name
VPC NameVPC resource name where the LB Server Group is created
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Service Subnet NameSubnet resource name where the LB Server Group is created
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
PortLB Server Group forwarding port
ProtocolLB Server Group forwarding protocol
Load BalancingLB Server Group traffic distribution method
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
LB Health CheckLB Health Check resource name
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
DescriptionLB Server Group additional description
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Table. LB Server Group detailed information tab items

Connected Resources

On the Connected Resources tab, you can view the list of members connected to the LB Server Group and add or delete members.

ItemDetailed Description
Add MemberAdd LB Server Group member button
Member NameMember name (server name) added to LB Server Group
IP AddressMember IP address
PortMember listening port
WeightLoad balancing weight
  • Default value 1
  • When using weighted load balancing (Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection) in LB Server Group, can enter 1 to 1000
EnabledWhether member is enabled
  • Enable: Receiving client requests
  • Disable: Excluded from receiving client requests
Creation DateMember addition date
Health Check StatusHealth check status information
  • Healthy: Health check normal
  • Unhealthy: Health check abnormal
  • Unknown: Cannot check health check status
StatusMember resource status
Table. LB Server Group connected resources list items

Tags

You can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the resource selected from the LB Server Group List page.

ItemDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view Key, Value information of the tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. LB Server Group tags tab items

Task History

On the Task History tab, you can view the task history of the selected resource.

ItemDetailed Description
Task DetailsTask execution content
Task DateTask execution date
Resource TypeResource type
Resource NameLB Server Group name
Task ResultTask execution result (Success/Failure)
Task User InformationUser information who performed the task
Table. LB Server Group task history list items

Managing LB Server Group Resources

You can view the member list of the LB Server Group and add or delete members.

Adding Member

You can add a member to the LB Server Group to register server resources that will process client requests.

Follow these steps to add a member to the LB Server Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.

  3. On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource for which you want to modify detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group Detail page.

  4. On the LB Server Group Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.

  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Add Member button in the upper right corner.

  6. In the Add Member popup window, enter the required information, then click the OK button.

    Item
    Required
    Detailed Description
    LB Server Group NameDefaultLB Server Group name to add member to
    Target ServerRequiredServer information to add as member
    • Virtual Server/Bare Metal Server: Select from the list of servers created in the same VPC as the LB Server Group
    • Direct IP Input: Enter server IP directly
    • Can add target server by clicking the Add button
    Member InformationRequiredSet member port and weight
    • Member Name: Display server name and IP to be added as member
    • Port: Port that the member will listen to
    • Weight: Weight to be applied to load balancing
      • When using Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection load balancing, must enter a value between 1 and 1000
    Table. LB Server Group member addition items

  7. In the notification window, click the OK button.

  8. Verify member addition on the Connected Resources tab.

Notice
For communication between Load Balancer and LB Server Group members, add the following rules to the Security Group of the server added as a member. * (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target Address) Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP, (Protocol) LB Server Group protocol, (Allowed Port) Member port
Note
  • If the LB Server Group is in Creating, Editing, Deleting, Error status, you cannot add members.
  • If the number of members that can be created in the Account to which the LB Server Group belongs is exceeded, you cannot add members. The maximum number of members that can be created in one Account is 1,000.
Note
  • You can add a server created in a different VPC as a member through VPC Peering. After adding the target server by Direct IP Input, check the Health Check Status of the added member on the Connected Resources tab.
    For details, refer to VPC > VPC Peering.

Modifying Member

Clicking the member name in the member list navigates you to the Member Detail page. You can view detailed information of the member and change information by clicking the Edit icon.

Follow these steps to modify member detailed information:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.
  3. On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource for which you want to modify detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group Detail page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the member you want to modify. You will be navigated to the Member Detail page.
  6. On the Member Detail page, modify the desired member information.

Modifying Weight

Can be modified when using weighted load balancing (Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection).

  • Click the Edit icon on the Weight item. Enter the weight to modify in the modification window and click the OK button.

Modifying Port

To modify the member port, click the Edit icon on the Port item. Enter the port to modify in the modification window and click the OK button.

Modifying Enabled

To modify member enabled status, click the Edit icon on the Enabled item. Set the enabled status in the modification window and click the OK button.

Note
If you modify Enabled to Disable, the member will only handle existing connections and stop new connections.

Deleting Member

Follow these steps to delete a member that is not in use:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.
  3. On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource for which you want to modify detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group Detail page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Detail page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be navigated to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the member you want to delete. You will be navigated to the Member Detail page.
  6. On the Member Detail page, click the Delete Member button.
  7. Verify member deletion on the Connected Resources tab.

Terminating LB Server Group

You can terminate an LB Server Group that is not in use. However, since it may affect application services, request termination after sufficient prior review.

Notice

You cannot terminate an LB Server Group in the following cases:

  • If the LB Server Group is in use by a Listener: Modify the LB Server Group of the Listener before terminating the LB Server Group.
  • If there are registered members in the LB Server Group: Delete all resources connected to the LB Server Group before terminating the LB Server Group.
  • If the LB Server Group is used in an Auto-Scaling Group: Set Load Balancer to not use in the Auto-Scaling Group or modify to not use that LB Server Group. For details, refer to Auto-Scaling Group > Using Load Balancer.

Follow these steps to terminate the LB Server Group:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group List page.
  3. On the LB Server Group List, click the resource you want to terminate. You will be navigated to the LB Server Group Detail page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Detail page, click the Delete LB Server Group button.
  5. When termination is complete, verify resource termination on the LB Server Group List.

3.2.2 - LB Health Check

You can create an LB Health Check through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it for LB Server Groups.

Creating LB Health Check

Note
You can create up to 500 LB Health Checks per Account.

Follow these steps to create an LB Health Check:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check List page.
  3. On the LB Health Check List page, click the Create LB Health Check button. You will be navigated to the Create LB Health Check page.
  4. On the Create LB Health Check page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • In the Service Information area, enter or select the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      LB Health Check NameRequiredLB Health Check resource name
      • Enter 3 to 63 characters using uppercase/lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters(-_)
      • LB Health Check name cannot be duplicated within an Account
      VPC NameRequiredSelect VPC to create LB Health Check
      • Select VPC where the LB Server Group to use the LB Health Check is created
      Service Subnet NameRequiredSelect VPC Subnet to create LB Health Check
      • Select Subnet where the LB Server Group to use the LB Health Check is created
      Health Check Method > ProtocolRequiredHealth check protocol
      • Select from TCP, HTTP to use for member health check
      Health Check Method > Health Check PortRequiredHealth check port
      • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534 to use for member health check
      Health Check Method > IntervalRequiredHealth check interval
      • Default value 5 seconds, can enter between 1 and 180 seconds
      Health Check Method > TimeoutRequiredHealth check response wait time
      • Default value 5 seconds, can enter between 1 and 180 seconds
      • Cannot set to a value greater than the interval
      Health Check Method > Healthy ThresholdRequiredNumber of times to determine health check status
      • Default value 3 times, can enter between 1 and 10
      Health Check Method > HTTP MethodRequiredSet HTTP request method (when using HTTP protocol)
      • Select from GET, POST
      Health Check Method > URL PathRequiredEnter health check URL path (when using HTTP protocol)
      • Enter within 50 characters using English letters, numbers, and special characters(/.-_?&=)
      Health Check Method > Response CodeRequiredEnter HTTP response code to receive from server (when using HTTP protocol)
      • Enter response codes in the 200 ~ 500 range
      Health Check Method > Request StringRequiredEnter health check request string (when using HTTP protocol POST method)
      • Enter content to include in Request Body within 255 bytes using English letters, numbers, and special characters(/.-_?&=)
      Table. LB Health Check service information input items
    • In the Additional Information area, enter or select the required information.
      Item
      Required
      Detailed Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter resource description
      TagOptionalAdd tag
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      Table. LB Server Group additional information input items
  5. In the Summary panel, review the created service information and estimated charges, then click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the LB Health Check List page.
Notice

For member health check in Load Balancer, add the following rules to the Security Group of the server added as a member.

  • (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target Address) Load Balancer’s health check IP, (Protocol) Health check protocol, (Allowed Port) Health check port
  • We recommend setting the health check port to be the same as the member port.
  • If the health check port and member port are different, health check is performed based on the member port.
Notice

Set the LB Health Check to a value that can respond from members to be added to the LB Server Group.

  • Since Load Balancer determines member status based on health check response, the LB Health Check result may differ from the actual service status.

Viewing LB Health Check Detailed Information

You can view and modify resource lists and detailed information from the LB Health Check menu. The LB Health Check Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Tags, and Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view detailed information of the LB Health Check:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check List page.

    • You can modify column display by clicking the Settings button in the upper right of the table.
      Item
      Display
      Detailed Description
      LB Health Check NameDefaultLB Health Check resource name
      Service Subnet IDDefaultVPC Subnet name where the LB Health Check is created
      LB Server Group CountDefaultNumber of LB Server Groups using the LB Health Check
      TypeDefaultLB Health Check type
      ProtocolDefaultLB Health Check protocol
      Creation DateDefaultLB Health Check creation date
      StatusDefaultLB Health Check resource status
      Table. LB Health Check list items
  3. On the LB Health Check List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check Detail page.

    • At the top of the LB Health Check Detail page, status information and description of additional features are displayed.
      ItemDetailed Description
      StatusLB Health Check resource status
      • Active: Service is normally activated
      • Deleting: Processing service termination request
      • Creating: Processing service creation request
      • Error: Cannot check current status due to internal error
        • If this status persists, contact Support Center
      • Editing: Processing service modification request
      Delete LB Health CheckDelete LB Health Check resource
      Table. LB Health Check status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

On the Detailed Information tab, you can view detailed information of the resource from the LB Health Check List and modify information if necessary.

ItemDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who requested service creation
Creation DateService creation date
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Modification DateService modification date
LB Health Check NameLB Health Check name
TypeLB Health Check type
VPC NameVPC to use the LB Health Check
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Service Subnet NameVPC Subnet to use the LB Health Check
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the detail page
Health Check MethodLB Health Check method setting information
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
DescriptionAdditional information about the LB Health Check
  • Can modify by clicking the Edit icon
Table. LB Health Check detailed information tab items

Connected Resources

On the Connected Resources tab, you can view detailed information of the LB Server Group connected to the LB Health Check.

ItemDetailed Description
LB Server Group NameLB Server Group resource name
  • Clicking the resource name navigates to the LB Server Group detail page
ProtocolLB Health Check protocol
Load Balancer NameLoad Balancer resource name connected to LB Server Group
Member CountNumber of members added to LB Server Group
Creation DateLB Server Group creation date
StatusLB Server Group resource status
  • Active: Service is normally activated
  • Deleting: Processing service termination request
  • Creating: Processing service creation request
  • Error: Cannot check current status due to internal error
    • If this status persists, contact Support Center
  • Editing: Processing service modification request
Table. LB Health Check connected resources list items

Tags

You can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the resource selected from the LB Health Check List page.

ItemDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view Key, Value information of the tag
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. LB Health Check tags tab items

Task History

On the Task History tab, you can view the task history of the selected resource.

ItemDetailed Description
Task DetailsTask execution content
Task DateTask execution date
Resource TypeResource type
Resource NameLB Health Check name
Task ResultTask execution result (Success/Failure)
Task User InformationUser information who performed the task
Table. LB Health Check task history list items

Modifying LB Health Check Method

You can modify the health check method on the LB Health Check Detail page.

Follow these steps to modify the LB Health Check method:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check List page.
  3. On the LB Health Check List page, click the resource for which you want to modify detailed information. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check Detail page.
  4. On the LB Health Check Detail page, click the Edit icon on Health Check Method. You will be navigated to the Modify Health Check Method popup window.
  5. In the Modify Health Check Method popup window, modify the required information, then click the OK button.

Terminating LB Health Check

You can terminate an LB Health Check service that is not in use.

Caution
  • You cannot delete LB Health Check resources of Default type.
  • You cannot delete LB Health Check resources in use by LB Server Groups.

Follow these steps to terminate the LB Health Check:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be navigated to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check List page.
  3. On the LB Health Check List, click the resource you want to terminate. You will be navigated to the LB Health Check Detail page.
  4. On the LB Health Check Detail page, click the Delete LB Health Check button.
  5. When termination is complete, verify resource termination on the LB Health Check List.

3.3 - API Reference

API Reference

3.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

3.5 - Release Note

Load Balancer

2025.12.16
FEATURE LB health check setting change and addition of LB health check, LB server group options
  • LB health check port configuration method has been changed.
    • You can choose between member port/direct input, and if you select direct input, specify the port to use.
    • Existing LB health checks are changed to member ports. (Same as the current health check method)
  • HTTPS option has been added to the LB health check protocol.
    • You can monitor the server TLS connection status.
  • When using URL redirection on the HTTP Listener, you can specify the target port for the redirection.
  • You can add Multi-node GPU Cluster resources to LB server group members.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Load Balancer Feature Added
  • You can set the Source NAT IP and health check IP when creating a Load Balancer.
  • TLS protocol has been added to L4 Listener.
    • You can configure TLS services based on TCP.
  • Routing rule option has been added to L7 Listener.
    • Routing conditions allow setting URL path or host-specific branching.
  • Supports multiple SSL certificates.
    • Supports SNI, allowing multiple certificates to be registered on a single Listener.
2025.07.01
FEATURE LB health check and LB server group feature addition
  • Add LB health check management feature
    • Create an LB health check to define the required health check method and connect it to an LB server group for use.
  • LB server group weighted load balancing support
    • Weighted Round Robin and Weighted Least Connection have been added to the load balancing options.
    • By setting per-member weights, you can distribute server load.
  • Add LB server group member activation feature
    • You can select whether to enable or disable members belonging to the LB server group.
2025.02.27
NEW New Load Balancer Service Launch
  • A Load Balancer service that provides more stable and enhanced features has been launched.
  • Provides an L7 Load Balancer that supports HTTP, HTTPS protocols.
  • Provides an L4 Load Balancer that supports TCP, UDP protocols.

4 - DNS

4.1 - Overview

Service Overview

The DNS service is a service that converts domain names, which are easy for humans to recognize, into IP addresses composed of numbers so that systems can identify them, allowing access to services.
Through the DNS service, users can easily register desired domains and manage domain records themselves.

Features

  • Easy Domain Registration: New domain registration/change management is possible through a web-based console. You can easily create and manage domains through the web without building a separate DNS infrastructure or installing a DNS solution.
  • Various Record Support: You can set various resource record types such as A, AAAA, CNAME, TXT, MX, SPF, etc., and automatically scale to handle large query volumes without user intervention.
  • Convenient Hosting Environment Management: You can select and use Public domain names that provide web services exposed to the Internet and Private domain names that can only be used by designated internal users without Internet connection according to the environment and purpose.

Configuration Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. DNS Configuration Diagram

Provided Functions

The DNS service provides the following functions.

  • Hosted Zone Creation/Management: You can create and manage Public Hosted Zones that can be accessed from anywhere through the Internet and Private Hosted Zones that can only be accessed in designated network environments without exposure to the Internet.
  • Public Domain Name Application: You can apply for a Public Domain Name that allows access from anywhere through the Internet.
  • Various Resource Record Support: You can select and use record types according to the usage environment and purpose.
Record TypeDescription
ASpecify the IPv4 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be found through the domain name
AAAASpecify the IPv6 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be found through the domain name
TXTSet text information about the domain
CNAMESpecify an alias for the domain name
MXSpecify the mail server for the domain and subdomains owned by the user
SPFVerify the IP address or domain name of the mail sending server to prevent spam emails (Sender Policy Framework)
NSName server responsible for the domain (automatically generated)
SOADefine the start information of the domain (start point of authority) (automatically generated)

Components

Private DNS

To manage Private domain names for use only in designated network environments without exposure to the Internet, you must first create a Private DNS. Private DNS names are commonly used in all regions within an Account. They can be created for the first time in any region within the Account, and thereafter can be activated with the same Private DNS name in other regions from the Private DNS list. You can select the VPC to connect to Private DNS for each region. By using a common Private DNS name, you can share and manage Private Hosted Zone information across all regions.

Hosted Zone

Private Hosted Zone allows you to create and manage domain names that can only be used in designated network environments targeting VPCs connected to Private DNS. Public Hosted Zone allows you to manage Public Domain Names created through Samsung Cloud Platform. Through Hosted Zone, you can register and modify records according to your purpose.

Public Domain Name

You can apply for a Public Domain Name in conjunction with Whois, a Public Domain Name management company. Public Domain Name can be purchased in one-year units, and you can set or change whether to automatically renew (in one-year units) up to 7 days before the purchase period ends.

Constraints

The constraints of the DNS service are as follows.

ItemDescription
Number of Private DNS that can be created within an Account1
Number of Hosted Zones that can be created within an Account20
Number of records that can be registered per Hosted Zone100
Note
  • Application for Public Domain Name and Public Hosted Zone use in the Korea South (kr-south) region is restricted.

Prerequisite Services

The DNS service has no prerequisite services.

4.1.1 - TLD List

TLD (Top-Level Domain) List

You can use the following TLDs. Different annual usage fees apply by TLD type when applying as a Public Domain Name.

TLD TypePublic Domain Name Registration Cost (KRW/year, excluding VAT)
.COM20,000
.NET20,000
.ORG20,000
.KR24,000
.PE.KR16,000
.BIZ20,000
.INFO20,000
.CN65,000
.TV90,000
.IN65,000
.EU80,000
.AC286,000
.TW100,000
.MOBI44,000
.NAME30,000
.CC90,000
.JP198,000
.ASIA55,000
.ME44,000
.TEL44,000
.PRO44,000
.SO103,000
.SX90,000
.CO100,000
.XXX200,000
.PW44,000
.PH100,000
.io91,000
.app42,500
.co.kr24,000

4.1.2 - ServiceWatch Metrics

DNS sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.

Reference
To check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Indicators

The following are the basic metrics for the DNS namespace.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
Table. DNS Basic Metrics

4.2 - How-to guides

This explains what to check before creating a DNS service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Before Using Private Domain Name Management

Verify the following before using Private Domain Name management.

  1. To manage Private domain names for use only in specified network environments without exposing to the internet, you must first create a Private DNS.
  2. The defined Private DNS name is used commonly across all regions within the Account. It can be created initially in any region within the Account, and thereafter in other regions, you activate and use it with the same Private DNS name from the Private DNS list.
  3. You can selectively set VPCs to connect to Private DNS per region. There are no connected VPCs at the time of initial creation or activation.
  4. The Private DNS name may already be in use within Samsung Cloud Platform, and you can check whether it is in use through duplicate checking when entering the domain name.
  5. Hosted Zone information will be shared across all regions. However, some detailed information (SRN, creator, modifier information) can only be verified in the region where it was initially created.

A general usage example is as follows. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the corresponding sub-service.

StepSub-serviceMain Procedure
STEP 1Private DNSCreate Private DNS (Region A) → Connect VPC within Region A → Activate Private DNS (Region B) → Connect VPC within Region B
STEP 2Hosted ZoneCreate Private Hosted Zone → Register records
STEP 3-View detailed information, modify, terminate
Table. Private Domain Name Management General Usage Procedure

Before Using Public Domain Name Management

Verify the following before using Public Domain Name management.

  1. For Public Domain Names to be used in internet environment, management through Hosted Zone is only possible for domain names applied for through Samsung Cloud Platform.
  2. The list of available top-level domains may change.

An example of general usage procedure is as follows. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the corresponding sub-service.

DivisionSub-serviceMain Procedure
STEP 1Public Domain NameCheck availability and apply for the Public Domain Name you want to use
STEP 2Hosted ZoneCreate Hosted Zone for the applied Public Domain Name → Register records
STEP 3-View detailed information, modify, terminate
Table. Public Domain Name Management General Usage Procedure

4.2.1 - Private DNS

Users can create the Private DNS service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Private DNS

You can create and use the Private DNS service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
Only one Private DNS service can be created per Account.

Follow these steps to request Private DNS service creation.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create Private DNS button in the dropdown on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create Private DNS page.
  3. Enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options on the Create Private DNS page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Private DNS NameRequiredEnter the Private DNS name to use
      • Enter within 3 to 20 characters including lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Cannot use the same as an already used name
      VPC ConnectionOptionalRegister VPCs to connect to Private DNS
      • Click the Select button to select VPCs
      • Can register up to 5 VPCs
      Table. Private DNS Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter additional information and description for Private DNS
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Private DNS Additional Information Input Items
  4. Review the creation details and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the Private DNS List page.

Viewing Private DNS Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the Private DNS service. The Private DNS Detail page consists of Detail Information, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view Private DNS detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private DNS menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Private DNS List page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS Detail page.
    • The Private DNS Detail page displays the status information and detailed information of Private DNS, and consists of Detail Information, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      Service StatusStatus of Private DNS
      • Creating: Creating
      • Activing: Activating
      • Active: Running
      • Inactive: Stopped
      • Editing: Changing settings
      • Deleting: Terminating
      • Error: Error occurred
      Service TerminationButton to terminate Private DNS
      Table. Private DNS Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the Private DNS List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Created AtDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modified AtDate and time when the service information was modified
Initial Creation LocationInitial creation location of Private DNS
VPC ConnectionVPC information connected to Private DNS
  • Can change VPC by clicking the Edit icon
  • Clicking connected VPC name navigates to detail page
DescriptionPrivate DNS description
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Table. Private DNS Detail Information Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the Private DNS List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Private DNS Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the Private DNS List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • Can view task details, task date and time, resource type, resource name, task result, task operator information
  • Clicking the corresponding resource in the Task History List list opens the Task History Detail popup window
Table. Private DNS Task History Tab Items

Activating Private DNS in a Location Other Than Initial Creation Location

You can activate and use Private DNS in a location (region) other than the location (region) where Private DNS was initially created.

Follow these steps to activate the Private DNS service.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private DNS menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS List page.
  3. Click the More > Activate button for the resource you want to activate in the Private DNS List. A notification window is displayed.
    • The activate button is only displayed for Private DNS items in Inactive status.
  4. Click OK in the notification window.

Setting VPC Connection for Private DNS

You can set VPC information connected to the Private DNS service.

Follow these steps to set VPC connection for Private DNS.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private DNS menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Private DNS List page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS Detail page.
  4. Click the Edit icon for the VPC Connection item on the Private DNS Detail page. The VPC Connection Selection Popup window opens.
  5. Select the VPC item to connect in the VPC Connection Selection Popup window and click OK.
  6. Verify that the selected VPC is displayed in the VPC Connection item.

Deleting Private DNS

You can apply for Private DNS service termination in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
You cannot terminate if Hosted Zone resources are connected to the Private DNS service. To terminate the service, delete the connected resources first.

Follow these steps to request Private DNS service termination.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private DNS menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Private DNS List page. You will be navigated to the Private DNS Detail page.
  4. Click the Service Termination button on the Private DNS Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify the service termination in the Private DNS list.

4.2.2 - Hosted Zone

Users can create the Hosted Zone service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Hosted Zone

You can create and use the Hosted Zone service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to request Hosted Zone service creation.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create Hosted Zone button in the dropdown on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Create Hosted Zone page.

  3. Enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options on the Create Hosted Zone page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Purpose DivisionRequiredSelect a domain that matches the purpose of Hosted Zone
      • Private: Domain that can only be used within Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Public: Domain that can be accessed from outside (internet)
      Private DNS Name to RegisterRequiredSelect from among Private DNS created in advance
      • Can only select when Private is selected in Purpose Division
      Hosted Zone Name to RegisterRequiredEnter the Hosted Zone name to use
      • Enter within 2 to 63 characters including lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to verify duplicates
      Table. Hosted Zone Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Enter Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Detailed Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter additional information and description for Hosted Zone
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Hosted Zone Additional Information Input Items
  4. Review the creation details and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource in the Hosted Zone List page.

Viewing Hosted Zone Detail Information

You can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information of the Hosted Zone service. The Hosted Zone Detail page consists of Detail Information, Records, Tags, Task History tabs.

Follow these steps to view Hosted Zone detail information.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the Service Home page.
  2. Click the Hosted Zone menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Hosted Zone List page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone Detail page.
    • The Hosted Zone Detail page displays the status information and detailed information of Hosted Zone, and consists of Detail Information, Records, Tags, Task History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      Service StatusStatus of Hosted Zone
      • Creating: Creating
      • Active: Running
      • Editing: Changing settings
      • Deleting: Terminating
      • Error: Error occurred
      Delete Hosted ZoneButton to delete Hosted Zone
      Table. Hosted Zone Status Information and Additional Features

Detail Information

You can view the detailed information of the resource selected on the Hosted Zone List page, and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDetailed Description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Created AtDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modified AtDate and time when the service information was modified
Hosted Zone NameHosted Zone domain name
Purpose DivisionDisplays the selected purpose
Private DNS NameSelected Private DNS name
DescriptionHosted Zone description
  • Can modify description by clicking the Edit icon
Table. Hosted Zone Detail Information Tab Items

Records

You can view the registered record information on the Hosted Zone List page, and add, change, or delete records. Records are items that set communication with DNS servers, informing the server of the IP address connected to the domain and how to handle requests sent to the domain.

DivisionDetailed Description
Detailed SearchButton to set detailed record search
Add RecordButton to add record
NameRegistered record name
TypeRecord type
  • A: Record that specifies IPv4 format IP address to domain name
  • AAAA: Record that specifies IPv6 format IP address to domain name
  • SPF: Record that registers server IP that sent spam mail for spam mail prevention
  • CNAME: Record that specifies alias of domain name
  • MX: Record that specifies mail server of domain
  • TXT: Record that enters text information (description) for domain
  • NS: Name server record responsible for the domain (automatically created)
  • SOA: Record that defines start information of domain (start point of authority) (automatically created)
ValueIP address of record
TTLTime for DNS response servers to temporarily store the record
Auto CreateDisplays whether automatically created
StatusDisplays service status
More MenuCan modify, delete record
Table. Hosted Zone Records Tab Items

Tags

You can view the tag information of the resource selected on the Hosted Zone List page, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can view tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Hosted Zone Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the Hosted Zone List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Task History ListResource change history
  • Can view task details, task date and time, resource type, resource name, task result, task operator information
  • Clicking the corresponding resource in the Task History List list opens the Task History Detail popup window
Table. Hosted Zone Task History Tab Items

Managing Hosted Zone Records

You can add or delete records to the Hosted Zone service.

Adding Records

Follow these steps to add records to Hosted Zone.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Hosted Zone menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Hosted Zone List page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone Detail page.
  4. Click the Records tab on the Hosted Zone Detail page. You will be navigated to the Records tab page.
  5. Click the Add Record button on the Records tab page. The Add Record window opens.
  6. Select the Type, Name, Value, TTL items in the add record window and click OK. The notification confirmation window opens.
    DivisionDetailed Description
    AEnter IPv4 format IP address
    • Click the Add button to add IP address, can register up to 8
    AAAAEnter IPv6 format IP address
    • Click the Add button to add IP address, can register up to 8
    SPFEnter IP of server that sent spam mail
    • When registering multiple servers, enter in format v=spf1 ip4:211.214.160.28 ip4:211.214.16.29 ~all
    CNAMEEnter record alias in domain name format
    • Cannot register if entered the same as other type of record value
    MXEnter priority and mail server address
    • Click the Add button to add server address, can register up to 8
    • When entering priority, enter within 0 - 65,535 range, the smaller the value, the higher the priority
    TXTEnter string
    • Enter within 250 characters
    Table. Detailed Items by Record Type
  7. Click OK in the notification confirmation window.
  8. Verify that the added item is displayed in the record list.

Modifying Records

Caution
Records created by the system or records in Error status cannot be modified.

Follow these steps to modify records in Hosted Zone.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Hosted Zone menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Hosted Zone List page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone Detail page.
  4. Click the Records tab on the Hosted Zone Detail page. You will be navigated to the Records tab page.
  5. Click the more menu in the list on the Records tab page and click Modify. The Modify Record window opens.
  6. Modify the desired items in the modify record window and click OK.
  7. Click OK in the notification confirmation window.

Deleting Records

Caution
Records created by the system cannot be deleted.

Follow these steps to delete records from Hosted Zone.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Hosted Zone menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Hosted Zone List page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone Detail page.
  4. Click the Records tab on the Hosted Zone Detail page. You will be navigated to the Records tab page.
  5. Click the more menu in the list on the Records tab page and click Delete. The notification confirmation window opens.
  6. Click OK in the notification confirmation window.

Deleting Hosted Zone

You can apply for Hosted Zone service termination in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
You cannot terminate if records are registered to the Hosted Zone service. To terminate the service, delete the registered records first.

Follow these steps to request Hosted Zone service termination.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be navigated to the DNS’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Hosted Zone menu on the Service Home page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view detailed information on the Hosted Zone List page. You will be navigated to the Hosted Zone Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete Hosted Zone button on the Hosted Zone Detail page.
  5. When termination is complete, verify the service termination in the Hosted Zone list.

4.2.3 - Public Domain Name

Users can create a Public Domain Name service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Public Domain Name

You can create and use a Public Domain Name service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a Public Domain Name service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Public Domain Name button from the dropdown. You will be redirected to the Create Public Domain Name page.
  3. On the Create Public Domain Name page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      Domain Name to RegisterRequiredEnter the Public Domain Name name to use
      • Enter 2-63 characters including lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to check for duplicates
      Purchase PeriodRequiredAutomatically selected as 1 year
      Auto RenewRequiredSet whether to automatically renew when the domain usage period expires
      • Select Use to enter detailed information
      • Registrant Name (Company Name): Enter the registrant name or company name within 30 characters
      • Registrant Email: Enter the registrant’s email address
      • Registrant Address: Enter the registrant’s company address, click the Find Zip Code button to search for the address and enter it
      • Phone Number: Enter the registrant’s phone number
      Table. Public Domain Name service information input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter additional information and description for the Public Domain Name
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select the Key, Value values
      Table. Public Domain Name additional information input items
  4. Review the creation details and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, you can verify the created resource on the Public Domain Name List page.
Caution
The domain auto-renewal feature can be changed up to one week before the domain usage expiration date. If the auto-renewal feature is not used, the domain information will be deleted on the domain usage expiration date.

Checking Public Domain Name Detailed Information

For the Public Domain Name service, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Public Domain Name Details page consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Registration Information, Tags, Operation History.

To check Public Domain Name detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name Details page.
    • The Public Domain Name Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the Public Domain Name, and consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Registration Information, Tags, Operation History.
      DivisionDescription
      Service StatusStatus of the Public Domain Name
      • Creating: Creating
      • Active: Operating
      • Editing: Changing settings
      • Registered: Period renewal registered
      • Transfer Requested: Domain transfer request completed
      • Expired: Usage period expired
      Transfer Domain Between AccountsTransfer domain between accounts request button
      • Cancel Transfer Request: Can cancel domain transfer request after transfer request completion
      • Approve Transfer Request: Can approve transfer request when receiving a domain transfer request
      • Reject Transfer Request: Can reject transfer request when receiving a domain transfer request
      Table. Public Domain Name status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
Domain NamePublic Domain Name domain name
Registration DatePublic Domain Name domain registration date
Purpose ClassificationDisplays the selected purpose
Expiration DatePublic Domain Name domain usage expiration date
Auto RenewDisplays whether auto-renewal feature is used
  • Click the Edit icon to change settings
DescriptionPublic Domain Name description
  • Click the Edit icon to modify the description
Table. Public Domain Name detailed information items

Registration Information

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can check and modify the domain registration information.

DivisionDescription
Registrant Name (Company Name)Registrant name or company name entered when applying for the service
Registrant EmailRegistrant email address entered when applying for the service
Registrant AddressRegistrant company address entered when applying for the service
Phone NumberRegistrant phone number entered when applying for the service
Table. Public Domain Name registration information tab items

Tags

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • You can check the Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Public Domain Name tag tab items

Operation History

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can check the operation history of the selected resource.

DivisionDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • You can check operation details, operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
  • Click the corresponding resource in the Operation History List to open the Operation History Details popup window
Table. Public Domain Name operation history tab detailed information items

Requesting Public Domain Transfer Between Accounts

You can transfer a registered Public Domain to another account user.

Note
  • If the domain you want to transfer is being used as a Hosted Zone, you cannot request a transfer. First delete the Hosted Zone in use and then request a transfer.
  • The auto-renewal of the domain you want to transfer must be set to Not Used to request a transfer. After the domain transfer, you can set up auto-renewal in the account that received the transfer.
  • You can request a domain transfer only up to 1 month before the registration period expiration date of the domain you want to transfer.

To transfer Public Domain information to another account user, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Transfer Domain Between Accounts button. The Transfer Domain Between Accounts popup window will open.
  5. In the Transfer Domain Between Accounts popup window, enter the account ID to transfer to and click the Confirm button.
    • When the domain transfer request is completed, the status changes to Transfer requested, and the applicant can click the Cancel Transfer Request button to cancel the transfer request.
    • After the domain transfer request, when another account user approves the transfer, the domain information is deleted from the transfer request account.
    • If the user who received the transfer request does not approve within 7 days after the approval request, the transfer request is automatically canceled.

Managing Public Domain Information Transfer Request

When another account user transfers a Public Domain, you can approve or reject the request.

Approving Public Domain Information Transfer Request

To approve a Public Domain transfer request, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Approve Transfer Request button. Click the Confirm button in the notification window.

Rejecting Public Domain Information Transfer Request

To reject a Public Domain transfer request, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Reject Transfer Request button. Click the Confirm button in the notification window.

Modifying Public Domain Name Registration Information

You can modify the registration information of the Public Domain Name.

To modify the registration information of the Public Domain Name, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. You will be redirected to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Registration Information tab. You will be redirected to the Registration Information tab page.
  5. On the Registration Information tab page, click the Edit button. You will be redirected to the Edit Registration Information page.
  6. On the Edit Registration Information page, modify the desired items and click the Complete button.

4.3 - Release Note

DNS

2026.03.19
FEATURE DNS Feature Improvements
  • In conjunction with the Service Watch service, you can view measurements for the following 5 items.
    • Number of server error responses (unit: seconds)
    • Number of NXDOMAIN responses (unit: seconds)
    • Number of queries not responded within 1 second (unit: seconds)
    • Number of outgoing UDP queries (unit: seconds)
    • Number of UDP-based data request processing (unit: seconds)
2025.12.16
FEATURE Added Public Domain Name Transfer Feature Between User Accounts
  • Public Domain Names registered through Samsung Cloud Platform can be transferred to other user accounts within the allowed period.
2025.07.01
NEW DNS Service Official Version Release
  • Officially released DNS service available in private network and internet environments. You can manage Private DNS and Private Hosted Zone targeting limited networks, and apply for Public Domain Name registration for internet environment and manage Public Hosted Zone.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Release
  • Beta released DNS service that provides new domain registration application and management functions based on user requests.

5 - VPN

5.1 - Overview

Service Overview

VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a service that connects the customer network and Samsung Cloud Platform through an encrypted virtual private network.

Configuration Diagram
Figure. VPN Configuration Diagram

Features

  • Rapid Service Provision You can set up automated services through the web-based Console, and you can use the VPN service immediately without any waiting time after creating the service.

  • Secure Access You can safely access your internal network built on the Samsung Cloud Platform from your customer’s network outside through encrypted virtual tunneling using a performance and stability verified IPsec VPN.

  • Easy Operation Environment You can easily and quickly manage web-based deployment, capacity provisioning, and service updates without the complex network environment configuration.

  • Efficient Service Use It is possible to manage costs efficiently because you can pay only for the amount of service used without any separate installation costs.

Provided Features

VPN provides the following functions.

  • Providing virtual tunneling encrypted with IPsec
    • Compatible VPN: Secui – Bluemax (TG360),Paloalto,Axgate,Cisco-router/ASA/Meraki, Checkpoint,AWS,Azure,Vmware NSX-T
  • Create Virtual Private Gateway
    • Create a Gateway to connect the customer’s network to a private network that cannot be accessed from the outside
  • VPN Tunnel Creation
    • Select IPsec VPN Gateway (The maximum number of VPN Tunnels per VPN Gateway is 5)
    • IPsec VPN Gateway redundancy configuration, when a failure occurs in the Active device, the Standby device operates automatically

Constraints

DivisionBasic QuotaDetailed Description
VPN Gateway33 creations possible per Account
VPN Tunnel5Up to 5 can be created per VPN Gateway
Table. VPN Restrictions

Region-based provision status

VPN is available in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Western Korea(kr-west1)Provided
South Korea, southern region1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea, southern region 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea southern region 3(kr-south3)Provided
Table. Current Status of VPN Services by Region

Preceding Service

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
Fig. Preceding VPN Service

5.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

VPN sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.

Reference
How to check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Indicators

The following are the basic metrics for the VPN namespace.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
Table. VPN Basic Metrics

5.2 - How-to guides

Creating a VPN

You can create and use VPN services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
You can create up to 3 VPNs per Account. If you exceed the creation limit, you cannot create a new VPN.

To create a VPN, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN button. You will be redirected to the Create VPN page.

  3. On the Create VPN page, enter the required information for service creation and select detailed options.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      VPN Gateway NameRequiredEnter the VPN Gateway name
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using alphanumeric characters
      Connected VPC NameRequiredSelect the VPC connected to the VPN Gateway
      • Click + New Creation to create a VPC and then select it
      Public IPRequiredSelect the IP for the VPN Gateway to communicate with remote sites
      Table. VPN Service Information Input Items

    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      DescriptionOptionalUser additional description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. VPN Service Additional Information Input Items

  4. On the Summary panel, review the detailed information of creation and estimated charges, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPN List page.

Viewing VPN Detailed Information

For VPN services, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The VPN Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, and Task History tabs.

To view the detailed information of VPN services, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN List page.
  3. On the VPN List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be redirected to the VPN Detail page.
    • The VPC Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Tags, and Task History tabs.

Detailed Information

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the VPN List page.

ItemDescription
Service StatusCurrent status
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Creating: Creation in progress
  • Editing: Configuration in progress
  • Deleting: Termination in progress
  • Error: Current status unknown
    • If this occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Service TerminationVPN Service Termination
Table. VPN Status Information and Additional Features
ItemDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameVPN resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation Date/TimeDate/Time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modification Date/TimeDate/Time when the service information was modified
VPN Gateway NameVPN Gateway name
Connected VPC NameVPC name connected to VPN
Public IPIP information for VPN Gateway to communicate with remote sites
DescriptionUser-written additional description
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
Table. VPN Detailed Information Items

Tags

On the VPN List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete tags.

ItemDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • View tag Key, Value information
  • Add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. VPN Tag Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the VPN Detail page.

ItemDescription
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date/time, resource name, task details, task results, and task performer information
Table. VPN Task History Tab Detailed Information Items

Terminating a VPN

You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs. However, since terminating the service can immediately stop operating services, you must fully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with termination.

Caution
  • You cannot terminate if there are resources connected to the VPN, such as VPN Tunnels.
  • You cannot terminate if the VPN service status is Creating or Editing.

To terminate a VPN, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN List page.
  3. On the VPN List page, select the resource to terminate. You will be redirected to the VPN Detail page.
  4. On the VPN Detail page, click the Service Termination button.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been terminated on the VPN List page.

5.2.1 - VPN Tunnel

Creating a VPN Tunnel

You can configure IPSec Tunneling with remote sites in the VPN service using the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPN Tunnel, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be redirected to the Create VPN Tunnel page.

  3. On the Create VPN Tunnel page, enter the required information for service creation and select detailed options.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      VPN Tunnel NameRequiredEnter the VPN Tunnel name
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using alphanumeric characters
      VPC Gateway NameRequiredSelect the VPN Gateway to connect
      VPC NameDefaultVPC information connected to VPN Gateway is automatically entered
      Public IPDefaultIP information for VPN Gateway to communicate with remote sites is automatically entered
      Peer VPN GW IPRequiredEnter the IP information of the remote VPN
      • Example: 192.168.10.0
      Remote Subnet(CIDR)RequiredEnter the subnet address of the remote site to connect
      • After entering the IP address, click the Add button, up to 10 can be added
      • Example: 20.0.0.0/24
      Pre-shared KeyRequiredEnter the shared key (PSK) to be used for IKE mutual authentication between VPN gateways
      • Enter 8 to 64 characters
      • Recommended to use a 32-character alphanumeric combination string
      DescriptionOptionalUser additional description
      Table. VPN Tunnel Service Information Input Items

    • Enter or select the required information in the Tunnel Configuration section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      IKE Configuration > IKE VersionRequiredSelect IKE version
      IKE Configuration > Algorithm ConfigurationRequiredSelect Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button
      IKE Configuration > Diffie-HellmanRequiredSelect Diffie-Hellman group
      IKE Configuration > SA LifeTimeRequiredEnter the VPN session (Security Association) validity period
      IPSec Configuration > Algorithm ConfigurationRequiredSelect Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button
      IPSec Configuration > Perfect Forward Secrecy(PFS)RequiredSelect whether to use PFS group
      IPSec Configuration > Diffie-HellmanRequiredSelect Diffie-Hellman group
      IPSec Configuration > SA LifeTimeRequiredEnter the VPN session (Security Association) validity period
      Table. VPN Tunnel Configuration Items

    • Enter the required information in the DPD Additional Configuration section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      DPD Additional Configuration > DPD probe intervalRequiredEnter the DPD check interval
      • Enter a value between 1 and 3,600 seconds
      Table. VPN Tunnel DPD Additional Configuration Input Items

    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.

      Item
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. VPN Tunnel Additional Information Input Items

  4. On the Summary panel, review the detailed information of creation and estimated charges, then click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPN Tunnel List page.

Viewing VPN Tunnel Detailed Information

For VPN Tunnel services, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The VPN Tunnel Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, and Task History tabs.

To view VPN detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be redirected to the VPN Tunnel List page.
  3. On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be redirected to the VPN Tunnel Detail page.
    • The VPN Tunnel Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Tags, and Task History tabs.
ItemDescription
StatusCurrent status
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Creating: Creating
  • Editing: Changing information
  • Deleting: Deleting
  • Error: Cannot confirm current status
    • If this occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
VPN Tunnel DeletionVPN Tunnel delete button
Table. VPN Tunnel Status Information and Additional Features

Detailed Information

On the VPN Tunnel List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ItemDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameVPN resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation Date/TimeDate/Time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification Date/TimeDate/Time when the service information was modified
VPN Tunnel NameVPN Tunnel name
VPN Gateway NameVPN Gateway name
Public IPPublic IP information
Peer VPN GW IPPeer VPN GW information
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
Remote Subnet (CIDR)Remote Subnet information
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
Pre-shared KeyPre-shared Key information
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
StatusCurrent service connection status
DescriptionVPN Tunnel additional description
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
IKEClick the Modify button to modify configuration information in bulk
IKE VersionIKE Version information
Encryption Algorithm/Digest AlgorithmAlgorithm information
Diffie-HellmanDiffie-Hellman information
SA LifeTimeSA LifeTime information
IPSecClick the Modify button to modify configuration information in bulk
Encryption Algorithm/Digest AlgorithmAlgorithm information
Diffie-HellmanDiffie-Hellman information
SA LifeTimeSA LifeTime information
Perfect Forward Secrecy(PFS)PFS configuration information
DPDDPD probe interval information
  • Click the Modify icon to modify
Table. VPN Tunnel Detailed Information Items

Tags

On the VPN Tunnel List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete tags.

ItemDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • View tag Key, Value information
  • Add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. VPN Tunnel Tag Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the VPN Tunnel List page.

ItemDescription
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date/time, resource name, task details, task results, and task performer information
Table. VPN Tunnel Task History Tab Detailed Information Items

Deleting a VPN Tunnel

You can delete unused VPC Tunnels to reduce operating costs. However, since deleting a Tunnel can immediately stop operating services, you must fully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with deletion.

To delete a VPN, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be redirected to the VPN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be redirected to the VPN Tunnel List page.
  3. On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be redirected to the VPN Tunnel Detail page.
  4. Click the VPN Tunnel Delete button.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted on the VPN Tunnel List page.

5.3 - API Reference

API Reference

5.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

5.5 - Release Note

VPN

2025.10.23
FEATURE Change in the number of additional remote site subnets for VPN Tunnel
  • You can enter up to 10 remote subnets (CIDR).
2024.02.27
NEW Official Release of VPN Service
  • A VPN service has been released that connects the customer network and Samsung Cloud Platform through an encrypted (IPSec) virtual private network.

6 - Firewall

6.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Firewall is a virtual logical firewall service that controls traffic occurring from VPC and Load Balancer of Samsung Cloud Platform.

The target resources that can be applied in the Firewall are Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer, and it is possible to manage a safe network by setting rules for communication between VPC and the internet, and VPC and customer network.

When the Firewall is first created, it blocks all Inbound/Outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any Deny).

Users can create Inbound/Outbound rules by specifying IP addresses, ports, and protocols, and only allowed traffic can communicate with the created rules.

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Firewall Configuration Diagram

Component

The components that make up the Firewall are as follows.

ComponentDetailed Description
Applied targetFirewall applied target resource
  • Apply Firewall to Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer as target
  • Firewall checks whether to use Firewall when creating the target resource and creates it together
Firewall sizeFirewall is provided in 5 sizes according to the rule quota
  • Extra Small: 5
  • Small: 100
  • Medium: 200
  • Large: 500
  • Extra Large: 1,000
Firewall rules
  • When the Firewall is first created, it blocks all Inbound/Outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any Deny).
  • Allows Inbound/Outbound rules to be added by setting the target address, protocol, and port
  • Provides a batch creation function for rules through form creation
Fig. Firewall Service Components

Constraints

The Samsung Cloud Platform’s Firewall has a quota (limit) for the maximum number of rules that can be created by size. When creating a Firewall, it is created with Extra Small by default, and the Firewall size can be changed on the Firewall details page in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

SizeRule AllocationDetailed Description
Extra Small5 itemsmaximum number of rules that can be created 5 items
Small100 piecesmaximum number of rules that can be generated 100 pieces
Medium200maximum number of rules that can be generated 200
Large500 piecesmaximum number of rules that can be generated 500 pieces
Extra Large1,000 itemsmaximum number of rules that can be created 1,000 items
Table. Firewall Restrictions

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the Firewall service. Please refer to the user guide (reference link) below for more information and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that quickly and securely connects the customer’s network and the Samsung Cloud Platform’s network
NetworkingLoad BalancerA service that distributes traffic to multiple servers to maintain a stable service
Fig. Preceding Firewall Service

6.2 - How-to guides

Users can create a Firewall service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Firewall

You can create and use a Firewall service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Notice

The Firewall service must be set to Use in the prerequisite service of Networking to be created. Firewalls set to use can be checked on the Firewall list.

  • Firewall cannot be created separately like other services on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To set up Firewall use, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the prerequisite service to create. You will be redirected to the service creation page.

    • Create VPC: Set up Firewall use for Internet Gateway and Transit Gateway of VPC service.
      • When creating VPC’s Internet Gateway service, set the Use Firewall item to Use. For detailed instructions, refer to Creating Internet Gateway.
      • Create VPC’s Transit Gateway service and apply for the Uplink Firewall associated service. For detailed instructions, refer to Creating Transit Gateway.
    • Create Direct Connet: Set the Use Firewall item to Use when creating the Direct Connet service. For detailed instructions, refer to Creating Direct Connect.
    • Create Load Balancer: Set the Use Firewall item to Use when creating the Load Balancer service. For detailed instructions, refer to Creating Load Balancer.
  3. When the prerequisite service creation is complete, check whether the Firewall resource is displayed on the Firewall List.

Checking Firewall Detailed Information

For the Firewall service, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information from the resource management menu.

To check Firewall detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
    • On the Firewall List page, you can check the following information.
      DivisionDescription
      Firewall NameAutomatically created in Firewall prerequisite service type_Firewall format
      Firewall DivisionFirewall prerequisite service type (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer)
      SizeFirewall size selected by user
      VPC NameVPC name connected to Firewall
      Connection NameAutomatically created in prerequisite service name using Firewall_Firewall format
      Number of RulesNumber of rules in use in the Firewall
      Use StatusWhether Firewall is used (activated) or not used (deactivated)
      • If not used, Any Allow rule is applied and no billing is charged for Firewall
      StatusDisplays Firewall status
      • Click the More button to set Use/Not Use
      Table. Firewall resource list items
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
    • The Firewall Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Rules, Tags, Operation History.
      DivisionDescription
      Service StatusDisplays Firewall status
      • Creating: Creating
      • Active: Operating
      • Editing: Changing
      • Deploying: Deployment complete
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred
      Table. Firewall status information

Detailed Information

On the Firewall List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
Firewall NameAutomatically created as resource name_Firewall_connection name
Firewall IDUnique resource ID in the service
Firewall DivisionFirewall prerequisite service type (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer)
SizeFirewall size selected by user
  • Click the Edit icon to change settings
Firewall Rule Count/QuotaRule quota and number of rules in use for the Firewall
VPC NameVPC name connected to Firewall
  • Click VPC name to move to details page
VPC IDVPC ID connected to Firewall
Connection NameAutomatically created as {Firewall prerequisite service name_Firewall}
  • Click connection name to move to details page
Log Storage StatusWhether to store Firewall logs
  • Use: Store logs
  • Not Use: Do not store logs
  • Click the Edit icon to change settings
Table. Firewall detailed information

Rules

On the Firewall List page, you can check the rule list of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete rules.

DivisionDescription
Excel DownloadDownload the currently entered rule list as an Excel (*.xlsx) file
Detailed SearchSearch for rules matching conditions set by the user
  • Supports string partial match (LIKE) search
Modify RuleModify and delete rules displayed in the rule list
  • Click the button to move to the rule modification page
Add RuleAdd a new Firewall rule
  • Click the button to move to the rule addition page
OrderDisplays rule order, applied Top down according to rule order
Rule IDUnique ID value for the rule
  • Click rule ID to check rule detailed information in a popup window
Rule IndexUnique Index value for the rule, used for log analysis
Source AddressSource address added to the rule
Destination AddressDestination address added to the rule, displayed as IP address according to the entered rule
ServiceProtocol and destination port
ActionTraffic Allow/Deny distinction due to rule
  • Allow: Allow traffic if matches rule
  • Deny: Block traffic if matches rule
DirectionAccess direction of traffic based on Firewall
  • Inbound: External → Internal
  • Outbound: Internal → External
Active StatusDisplays whether the rule is active, rule does not operate if in inactive state
StatusDisplays rule status
Table. Firewall rule list detailed information

Tags

On the Firewall List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • You can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Firewall tag tab items

Operation History

On the Firewall List page, you can check the operation history of the selected resource.

DivisionDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Check operation date and time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
  • Click the button to perform detailed search
Table. Firewall operation history tab detailed information items

Managing Firewall Rules

You can add, modify, or delete Firewall rules.

Caution
  • Rules can be added or modified only when the Firewall status is Active.
  • Rules cannot be added if there is no status view permission for the prerequisite service.
Note
  • The firewall periodically caches Domain rules registered by the user and retains IP information for a certain period.
  • If the caching result of the registered Domain rule does not match the user’s IP, communication may be restricted.

Creating Rules

You can add Firewall rule information by directly entering it on the Rules tab.

To add a Firewall rule, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to which you want to add rules. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will be redirected to the Add Rule page.
  6. Enter the required information on the Direct Input tab page.
  7. Check the added rule and click the Complete button.
Caution
If you move to another page without clicking the Confirm button after entering content on the add rule page, all entered items will be initialized, so please be careful.
DivisionRequiredDescription
Rule PositionRequiredSpecify the position of the rule to create
Rule ID to CopyOptionalEnter the Firewall rule ID to copy and click the Search button to select
Source AddressRequiredSource address to add to the rule
  • Can enter multiple addresses up to 128 at once using Comma (,), range (-) in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format
Destination AddressRequiredSelect the type of destination address to add to the rule
  • Select IP: Can enter multiple addresses up to 128 at once using Comma (,), range (-) in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format
  • Select Domain: Can enter up to 128 full domain names in FQDN format at once using Comma (,)
  • Type items vary depending on the selected destination address format
TypeRequiredSelect the protocol type to apply the rule
  • Select Destination Port/Type: Select protocol type
  • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol number, can enter up to 128
  • All: Select destination port/Type, protocol to the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
Type > ProtocolRequiredSelect the detailed protocol of the type
  • Select the protocol desired by the user among TCP, UDP, ICMP, input items vary depending on the selected protocol
  • When selecting ICMP in protocol, can set ICMP Type
    • Select frequently used Type items such as Echo among values defined as ICMP Type
    • Click the Add button to add input value
  • When selecting TCP/UDP in protocol, can select allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, TELENET
    • When entering directly, can enter values from 1 to 65,535, can enter up to 128 at once using Comma (,), range (-)
    • Click the Add button to add input value
  • When selecting Internet Protocol in type, enter protocol number within 1 ~ 254
ActionRequiredDistinguish traffic allow/block due to rule
  • Allow: Allow traffic if matches rule
  • Deny: Block traffic if matches rule
DirectionRequiredAccess direction of traffic based on Firewall
  • Inbound: External → Internal
  • Outbound: Internal → External
DescriptionOptionalAdditional description written by the user
Added Rule-Check list of entered rules
  • Move Up: Move selected rule up
  • Move Down: Move selected rule down
  • Delete: Delete selected rule
Table. Firewall rule add > direct input tab items

Creating Rules in Batch

To add multiple Firewall rules at once, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to which you want to add rules. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will be redirected to the Add Rule page.
  6. On the Add Rule page, click the Batch Input Rules tab.
  7. Select Rule Position. If you do not select a position, it will be added to the last order of the rules.
  8. On Select File, click the Download Form button. The batch input rule Excel file will be downloaded.
  9. Enter rule information in the batch input rule Excel file and save it.
  10. On Select File, click Attach File to attach the created Excel file and click Add.
    • If the attached Excel file format is different from the registration form or the file is encrypted, it cannot be uploaded.
    • The maximum number of batch registration rules that can be uploaded at once is 100. If the maximum registration rule count is exceeded, it cannot be uploaded.
    • If the maximum rule count set according to the firewall size is exceeded, the file cannot be uploaded.
  11. Check whether the entered rules are displayed on the Added Rules list and adjust the order.
  12. Check the added rules and click the Complete button.

Modifying Rules

You can select a Firewall rule to check and modify rule information.

To modify a Firewall rule, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.

  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource for which you want to modify rules. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.

  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.

  5. On the Rules tab, click the Modify Rule button. You will be redirected to the Modify Rule page.

    • On the rule modification page, you can set the following items:
      • Activate: Activates the selected rule.
      • Deactivate: Deactivates the selected rule. Deactivated rules are not applied to the prerequisite service.
      • Delete: Deletes the selected rule. When you click delete, it is displayed as Delete Scheduled status in the changes.
      • Cancel Delete: If in delete scheduled status, you can cancel the rule deletion.
  6. On the Modify Rule page, click the Edit button for the item to modify. The Modify Rule popup window will open.

  7. In the Modify Rule popup window, enter the item to modify and click the Confirm button.

    DivisionRequiredDescription
    Order-Order of the rule, order can be changed by clicking Move Up/Move Down in the added rule list
    Rule ID-Unique ID value for the rule, cannot be changed
    Rule Index-Unique Index value for the rule, can be used for log analysis
    Source AddressRequiredSource address registered in the rule
    • Can change by entering multiple addresses up to 128 at once using Comma (,), range (-) in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format
    Destination AddressRequiredDestination address to add to the rule
    • Can change by entering multiple addresses up to 128 at once using Comma (,), range (-) in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format
    TypeRequiredSet protocol type according to the selected destination address item
    ActionRequiredCan change traffic Allow/Deny distinction due to rule
    • Allow: Allow traffic if matches rule
    • Deny: Block traffic if matches rule
    DirectionRequiredCan change access direction of traffic based on Firewall registered in the rule
    • Inbound: External → Internal
    • Outbound: Internal → External
    Rule PositionRequiredCan change rule position
    Active StatusRequiredWhether the rule is active, rule does not operate if in inactive state
    Status-Status value for the rule
    DescriptionOptionalAdditional description written by the user
    Table. Firewall rule modification detailed items

  8. Check the modified rule and click the Complete button.

Deleting Rules

Caution
Can only delete when Firewall is in Active status and rule is in Active, Error status.

To delete a Firewall rule, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource for which you want to modify rules. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be redirected to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Modify Rule button. You will be redirected to the Modify Rule page.
  6. On the Modify Rule page, select the rule to delete and click the Delete button.
    • When the deletion request is completed, it is displayed as Delete Scheduled in the changes item.
    • You can cancel rule deletion by clicking Cancel Delete.
  7. On the Modify Rule page, click the Complete button.

Managing Firewall Resources

You can modify the Firewall size and change the log use settings.

Modifying Firewall Size

To modify the Firewall size, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to modify. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Edit icon for Size. You will be redirected to the Modify Size popup window.
  5. In the Modify Size popup window, select the size to modify and click the Confirm button.
Note

Firewall size is provided as Extra Small (rule quota 5) by default, and you can add Firewall rules by changing the Firewall size to use them. In Nuri SCP, the project/region selection distinction has disappeared, so we comment out the following statement. (25.01.24)

  • Firewall fees are charged based on Firewall service size and traffic throughput.

Using Log Storage

Note

To store Firewall logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store logs, set the bucket as the log storage in Firewall Logging, and then set log storage in Firewall details to store Firewall logs in the Object Storage bucket.

  • Log storage settings can be checked in Firewall Logging. For more information, refer to Firewall Logging.
  • If log storage is set, Object Storage fees for log storage are charged.

To use Firewall log storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) to use log storage. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Edit icon for Log Storage Status. You will be redirected to the Modify Log Storage Status popup window.
  5. In the Modify Log Storage Status popup window, select Use for log storage and click the Confirm button.
Caution
If log storage is not set in Firewall Logging, you cannot set log storage Use.

Setting Log Storage to Not Use

To set Firewall log storage to not use, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) to set log storage to not use. You will be redirected to the Firewall Details page.
  4. Click the Modify Log Storage Status button. You will be redirected to the Modify Log Storage Status popup window.
  5. In the Modify Log Storage Status popup window, deselect Use for log storage and click the Confirm button.
  6. Check the message in the Notification popup window and click the Confirm button.
Caution
If you disable log storage, log storage for the service is stopped and tracking management through log analysis is not possible in case of a security incident.

Setting Firewall to Not Use

The Firewall service cannot be deleted separately. When you delete the prerequisite service, the connected Firewall is also deleted. If you want to maintain the prerequisite service and not use the Firewall, you can change the Firewall to not use status on the Firewall list page.

Caution
  • If you change the Firewall to not use status, all previously registered rules will be deleted.
  • If the connected Firewall has rules when deleting the prerequisite service, you cannot delete it. Delete the Firewall rules before deleting the prerequisite service.

To set Firewall to not use, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, click More > Not Use for the resource to switch to not use.
  4. When the use status change is complete, check whether the resource’s use status has changed to not use on the Firewall List page.

6.2.1 - Firewall Logging

To store Firewall logs, you must first create a bucket in Object Storage to store the logs, set the bucket as the log storage in Firewall Logging, and then set log storage on the Firewall Details page to store Firewall logs in the Object Storage bucket.

To store Firewall logs, set up according to the following order:

  1. To store firewall logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an already created bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Creating Object Storage.
  2. To set the bucket as the log storage in Firewall Logging, refer to Using Firewall Logging Log Storage.
  3. To set log storage status to Use in Firewall details, refer to Using Firewall Log Storage.

Setting Up Firewall Logging Log Storage

To set the Firewall log storage status to Use, you must first set the log storage in Firewall Logging.

Note
To set Firewall Logging log storage, you need an Object Storage bucket for log storage. First, create a bucket in the Object Storage service. For more information, refer to Creating Object Storage.

To set up Firewall Logging log storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Logging List page.
  2. On the Firewall Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top. You will be redirected to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, select the Log Storage Bucket. When you select a bucket, the Log Storage Path is displayed.
  4. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, check the Log Storage Bucket and Log Storage Path, and then click the Confirm button.
  5. Check the message in the Notification popup window and click the Confirm button.
Notice
After setting up the Firewall Logging log storage, you must set log storage status to Use on the Firewall Details page to start log storage. For more information, refer to Using Firewall Log Storage.

Viewing Firewall Logging List

When you set the Firewall Logging log storage bucket, you can view the Firewall Logging list.

To view the Firewall Logging list, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Logging List page.
  2. On the Firewall Logging List page, check the resources in use and log storage targets.
    DivisionDescription
    Resource IDFirewall ID
    Storage TargetFirewall name
    Storage Registration DateFirewall log storage registration date
    Table. Firewall Logging list items
Note
After setting up the Firewall Logging log storage, you must set log storage status to Use in Firewall details to start log storage. For more information, refer to Using Firewall Log Storage.

Checking Firewall Logging Detailed Content

Refer to the following content to check the detailed content of stored logs.

Stored log example: 2024-10-11T11:23:43,deny,0,17,4.1.1.100,45499,192.168.10.10,53

DivisionDescription
2024-10-11T11:23:43Date and time when the log occurred (2024-10-11, 11:23:43)
denyAction (deny / accept)
0Firewall Rule ID (Policy ID) where the log occurred
17IP Protocol ID
  • 1: ICMP
  • 6: TCP
  • 17: UDP
4.1.1.100Source IP
45499Source Port
192.168.10.10Destination IP
53Destination Port
Table. Log detailed information items

Setting Firewall Logging Log Storage to Not Use

You can set the log storage in Firewall Logging to not use.

To set Firewall Logging log storage to not use, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. You will be redirected to the Firewall Logging List page.
  2. On the Firewall Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top. You will be redirected to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
  3. In the Log Storage Settings popup window, select Not Use for the Log Storage Bucket and click the Confirm button.
Note
  • Log storage settings can be changed when there is no log storage target.
  • To change the log storage bucket, first change the setting to not use. Then you can change it by setting it to use again.

6.3 - API Reference

API Reference

6.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

6.5 - Release Note

Firewall

2026.03.19
FEATURE Firewall rule management structure change
  • For user convenience, pages for Firewall rule input and modification/deletion have been added. You can perform desired operations by moving to a separate page when managing Firewall rules.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Firewall rule input method added
  • Firewall rule input method added
    • In KR WEST and KR EAST regions, you can enter the destination address in FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) format.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Firewall rule input method added
  • Firewall rule input method added
    • A function to enter the IP protocol has been added.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Load Balancer-Firewall feature added
  • Firewall feature added
    • You can use Firewall in the Load Balancer service.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Common CX changes for Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, etc. have been reflected.
2024.12.23
FEATURE Firewall log storage feature added
  • A function to store Firewall logs has been added.
  • You can decide whether to store Firewall logs and store logs in Object Storage.
2024.10.01
NEW Firewall service official version release
  • You can control inbound and outbound traffic occurring in VPC through the Firewall service.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta version release
  • The Firewall service has been released.

7 - Direct Connect

7.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Samsung Cloud Platform provides the Direct Connect service to support secure and fast connections between customer networks and the Samsung Cloud Platform environment.

Through Direct Connect, you can allocate and use the internal private network range of existing systems to Samsung Cloud Platform resources. You can place backend systems such as application servers in private network ranges without Internet access, and enhance security by applying Samsung Cloud Platform network services such as Security Groups.

Through Direct Connect, customers’ existing systems can naturally migrate to Samsung Cloud Platform even if they have IP hardcoding on devices or architecture dependencies on IPs.

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Direct Connect Configuration Diagram

Creating a Direct Connect Connection

Supports connection by selecting a single VPC to connect to the customer network.
Provides access blocking through the Direct Connect Firewall, and provides a secure connection path through Route configuration.

Constraints

ItemBasic QuotaDescription
Direct Connect5Can be created per VPC within a service zone (1:1) on an Account basis.
Table. Direct Connect Constraints

Prerequisite Services

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guides provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDescription
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in the cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
Table. Direct Connect Prerequisite Services

7.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

Direct Connect sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided as basic monitoring are data collected at 5-minute intervals.

Note
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Metrics

The following are basic metrics for the namespace Direct Connect.

In the table below, metrics displayed in bold are key metrics selected from among the basic metrics provided by Direct Connect. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built per service in ServiceWatch.

For each metric, the user guide informs which statistical value is meaningful to use when querying that metric, and the statistical value displayed in bold among meaningful statistics is the key statistical value. In the service dashboard, you can query key metrics through key statistical values.

Metric NameDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
DirectConnect Network In BytesCumulative traffic volume from Direct Connect to VPCBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
DirectConnect Network Out BytesCumulative traffic volume from VPC to Direct ConnectBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
DirectConnect Network In Bytes_DeltaCumulative traffic volume from Direct Connect to VPC over 5 minutesBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
DirectConnect Network Out Bytes_DeltaCumulative traffic volume from VPC to Direct Connect over 5 minutesBytes
  • Sum
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. Direct Connect Basic Metrics

7.2 - How-to guides

Users can enter the required information for Direct Connect service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and select detailed options to create the service.

Creating a Direct Connect

You can create and use Direct Connect services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Direct Connect, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Direct Connect button. You will be redirected to the Create Direct Connect page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Item
      Required
      Description
      Direct Connect NameRequiredA name that makes it easy to identify Direct Connect
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using uppercase/lowercase letters and numbers
      Use UplinkRequiredBandwidth of the communication port for communicating with remote sites
      • Select port capacity 1G or port capacity 10G
      VPCRequiredSelect the VPC for communicating with remote sites
      DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for Direct Connect
      Use FirewallOptionalSelect whether to use Direct Connect Firewall.
      Store Firewall LogsOptionalWhether to store Firewall logs
      Table. Direct Connect Service Information Input Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Item
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Add up to 50 tags per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. Direct Connect Additional Information Input Items
  3. On the Summary panel, review the detailed information of creation and estimated charges, then click the Complete button.

    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Direct Connect List page.

Viewing Direct Connect Detailed Information

For Direct Connect services, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information in the Resource Management menu. The Direct Connect Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Rules, Tags, and Task History tabs.

To view Direct Connect detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect List page.
  3. On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Detail page.
    • The Direct Connect Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Rules, Tags, and Task History tabs.
      ItemDescription
      StatusCurrent status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Failed: Failed
      • Error: Cannot confirm current status
        • If this occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Service TerminationButton to terminate the service
      • If there are no connected services, terminate Direct Connect
      • If you terminate the service, operating services may stop immediately, so fully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with termination
      Table. Direct Connect Status Information and Additional Features

Detailed Information

On the Direct Connect List page, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ItemDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeDirect Connect resource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Direct Connect, means Direct Connect SRN
Resource NameDirect Connect resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in Direct Connect
CreatorUser who created Direct Connect
Creation Date/TimeDate/Time when Direct Connect was created
ModifierUser who modified Direct Connect information
Modification Date/TimeDate/Time when Direct Connect information was modified
Direct Connect NameDirect Connect VPC resource name
Use UplinkPort bandwidth allocated for line connection
Line Request/Termination SR ShortcutLine connection service for the Samsung Cloud Platform local section connected to the customer company line
  • Clicking the Line Request/Termination SR Shortcut button moves to the Service Request tab in the Support Center popup
  • For Samsung Cloud Platform external line connection for customer integration, create the Network Line Service service through the SDS sales representative
Connected VPC NameVPC name connected to Direct Connect
Firewall NameFirewall name
Use FirewallWhether to use Firewall
Table. Direct Connect Detailed Information Tab Items

Rules

You can register or modify communication rules between remote sites and VPC.

ItemDescription
Destination IPDestination IP information
DestinationRouting direction
Creation Date/TimeCreation date/time information
StatusConnection status
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Deleting: Deletion in progress
  • Creating: Creation in progress
  • Error: Cannot confirm current status
    • If this occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
DeleteYou can delete the rule.
Table. Direct Connect Rules Tab Items

Tags

On the Direct Connect List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete tags.

ItemDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • View tag Key, Value information
  • Add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from previously created Key and Value lists
Table. Direct Connect Tags Tab Items

Task History

You can view the task history of the resource selected on the Direct Connect List page.

ItemDescription
Task History ListResource change history
  • View task date/time, resource name, task details, task results, and task performer information
Table. Direct Connect Task History Tab Detailed Information Items

Adding Direct Connect Rules

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect List page.
  3. On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource to which you want to add a rule. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Detail page for that resource.
  4. On the Direct Connect Detail page, click the Rules tab.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will be redirected to the Add Rule popup.
  6. In the Add Rule popup, enter the required information and click the Confirm button.
    ItemDescription
    Destination IPEnter the destination IP range
    • Example: 192.168.25.0/24
    DestinationSelect between VPC and remote site according to the routing direction.
    Table. Direct Connect Rule Addition Input Items

Terminating a Direct Connect

You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs. However, since terminating the service can immediately stop operating services, you must fully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with termination.

Caution
Direct Connect cannot be terminated if there are connected resources.

To terminate a Direct Connect, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect List page.
  3. On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource to terminate. You will be redirected to the Direct Connect Detail page for that resource.
  4. On the Direct Connect Detail page, click the Service Termination button.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been terminated on the Direct Connect List page.

7.3 - API Reference

API Reference

7.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

7.5 - Release Note

Direct Connect

2025.02.27
NEW Common Feature Changes
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Reflected common CX changes, including Account, IAM, Service Home, and tags.
2024.10.01
NEW Direct Connect Service Official Release
  • Launching Direct Connect service, which quickly and securely connects customer networks and Samsung Cloud Platform networks.

8 - Cloud LAN-Campus

8.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Cloud LAN-Campus is a service that provides a wired and wireless integrated network usage environment based on user authentication within the customer’s business site. It provides a variety of wired and wireless integrated network access environments that can be used freely regardless of the location within the business site through simple user/device authentication, based on SDN (Software Defined Network). It minimizes existing physical network equipment and enables easy connection to multiple locations geographically distributed using the cloud. This allows companies to reduce the complexity of infrastructure construction and operation, and build a flexible and expandable network environment. Additionally, it enables the operation of business site networks in a more stable and efficient manner through optimized network design/configuration for customer environments, professional operating systems, and enhanced security management.

Provided Features

Cloud LAN-Campus provides the following functions.

  • Campus Network: Provides a wireless network usage environment and integrated authentication service for the workplace
  • NW Access: Infrastructure for business network usage (AP, NW Switch, etc.) and SDN system services
  • NW Authentication: User/device authentication-based network separation, multi-office authentication/security policy integrated management, support for various authentication methods (AD, certificate, etc.) and policy operation/management through service portal (user/administrator)
Configuration Diagram
Figure. Cloud LAN-Campus Configuration Diagram

Features

  • Rapid Business Network Work Environment: Provides a wired and wireless integrated network usage environment through a user authentication-based SDN (Software Defined Network) solution. IP Mobility and separate networks according to terminal purpose are applied immediately, and users can easily change the network through the service portal.
  • Network Security Enhancement: Logical network separation and authentication-based wired/wireless integrated security management system enable consistent security policy operation for users/devices. Even in environments where users access multiple headquarters and business sites, the same network access environment and security policy application are possible, and authentication information is safely managed under the Samsung Cloud Platform security system.
  • Multi-vendor accommodation and network total service provision: The configuration of SDN equipment in the business place becomes more flexible due to the multi-vendor network integrated authentication. Additionally, instead of customers designing, building, operating, and managing their own network infrastructure, a total service system is provided, thereby improving operational and management efficiency. Optimized network design for each business place and fast and stable network services are provided through a dedicated team.
  • Service-based integrated billing system: The service billing system can reduce initial investment costs and enable network infrastructure expansion and capacity increase when needed. It provides usage-based authentication services, and no separate operating personnel or maintenance contract is required.
  • Various authentication methods and extensibility: We provide optimal authentication solutions with various authentication methods. Additionally, functional extension and differential policy management according to the security level of each business site are possible through linkage with customer systems (groupware, security systems, etc.).

Component

Cloud LAN-Campus provides services across the entire network within the workplace. The components are as follows, and related service creation is possible.

DivisionDetailed Content
Network Authentication
  • Network access authentication and network separation, security policy management
  • Multi-vendor network integrated authentication management
  • Headquarters/branch integrated policy application, roaming support
  • Providing various authentication methods (certificate, AD, account/MAC, etc.) and extensibility
Service PortalWired/Wireless Integrated Authentication Service Portal Provided
  • User Portal: User Policy Creation/Change/Management
  • Admin Portal: Authentication Policy Management and Monitoring
Wired/Wireless NetworkSDN-based Wired/Wireless Network Design and Integrated Configuration/Operation/Management
WIPSWireless Intrusion Prevention System configuration/operation/management
Network SolutionDHCP, NMS etc. network solution configuration/operation/management
Fig. Cloud LAN-Campus Components

Constraints

When using the Cloud LAN-Campus service, there are the following restrictions.

  • Network communication/connection between the customer’s business site and the Samsung Cloud Platform region is required for CLAN authentication use.
    • Cloud Last Mile, dedicated line, VPN, etc. used In case of using network equipment from a specific vendor, prior consultation is required.
  • The start and end points of the service created for the equipment configuration in the business place are determined after consultation with the person in charge of AM.
  • When using AD integration as the authentication method, authentication-related policy rules must be normally deployed in advance on the user’s PC.
    • AD functionality issues require management by the customer’s AD administrator.
  • The network separation certificate method is supported for the specified OS type (currently limited to Windows), and additional costs are added excluding the authentication fee.

Regional Provision Status

Cloud LAN-Campus is available in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Western Korea(kr-west1)Provided
South Korea southern region 1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea, southern region 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea southern region 3(kr-south3)Not provided
Table. Cloud LAN-Campus Region-based Provisioning Status

Preceding Service

Cloud LAN-Campus has no preceding service.

8.2 - How-to guides

The user can enter the essential information of the Cloud LAN-Campus service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service by selecting detailed options.

Request to Create Campus Network Service

You can create and use the Campus Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a Campus Network service, follow the procedure below.

  1. Click All services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. It moves to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN-Campus service request button. It moves to the Support Center > Service Request page.
  3. Service Request page, enter or select the corresponding information in the required input area.
    • Select Campus Network service application in the work division.
      Input ItemDetailed Description
      TitleTitle of the service being requested
      RegionLocation selection of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Automatically entered as the region of the account
      ServiceSelect the service category and service for the corresponding service (automatic selection)
      • Service category: Networking
      • Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
      Work ClassificationSelect the type of service you want to perform
      • Campus Network service application: Select if you are newly requesting the service
      ContentDetailed information required to create Campus Network service
      • SCP account name: Enter the account name of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • SCP project name: Enter the project name of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Company/Corporation name: Enter the company/corporation name
      • Customer information (Name/E-mail/Phone number): Enter user information
      • Desired service start date: Enter the service start date
      • NW network separation: Enter Yes / No
      • Wired Network usage: Enter Yes / No
      • Wireless Network usage: Enter Yes / No
      • Wireless WIPS usage: Enter Yes / No
      • Network solution usage (NMS, WAN accelerator, DHCP, etc.): Enter Yes / No
      • Expected contract period: Enter 4 years / 5 years / 6 years
      • Operation service: Enter Yes / No
      AttachmentsIf you have additional files you want to share, upload them
      • Attached files can be up to 5 files, each 5MB or less
      • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
      Table. Detailed contents of Campus Network service request items
  4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page and click the Request button.
    • Once the application is complete, check the contents of the application on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    • The requested task will take around 5 to 7 business days.
Note
  • Once the service request is completed, the customer manager will contact you separately for business consulting and architecture optimization design.
  • Please contact the Samsung SDS person in charge of AM for progress and service-related inquiries.

Request to Cancel Campus Network Service

You can cancel the Campus Network service on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the cancellation of the Campus Network service, please follow the following procedure.

  1. Click All services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. It moves to the Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN-Campus service request button. It moves to the Support Center > Service Request page.

  3. Service Request page, please enter or select the corresponding information in the required input area.

    • Select Campus Network service cancellation in the work classification.
      Input ItemDetailed Description
      TitleTitle of the service being requested
      RegionLocation selection of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Automatically entered as the region of the account
      ServiceSelect the service category and service for the corresponding service (auto-select)
      • Service category: Networking
      • Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
      Work classificationSelect the type you want to perform
      • Campus Network service cancellation: Select if you want to request service cancellation
      ContentDetailed information required for Campus Network service cancellation
      • SCP account name: Enter the account name of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • SCP project name: Enter the project name of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Customer information (name/company/department/E-mail/phone number): Enter user information
      • Service cancellation request date: Enter the service cancellation date
      • Content: Enter additional content
      AttachmentsIf you have additional files you want to share, upload them
      • Attached files can be up to 5MB each, with a maximum of 5 files
      • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
      Fig. Campus Network Service Request Item Details
  4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page and click the Request button.

    • Once the application is complete, check the contents of the application on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
  • The requested task will take around 5 to 7 business days.
Note

When the service request is completed, the customer manager will contact you separately for service cancellation.

  • Please contact the Samsung SDS person in charge of AM for progress and service-related inquiries.

8.3 - Release Note

Cloud LAN Campus

2025.07.01
NEW Cloud LAN Campus_Enterprise Service Official Version Release
  • We have launched the Cloud LAN Campus service, which provides authentication-based wired and wireless integrated network services within the customer’s business site.

9 - Cloud LAN-Data Center

9.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Cloud LAN-Data Center is a shared network infrastructure based on SDDC (Software-Defined Data Center) in the data center of the Samsung Cloud Platform region or the customer’s on-premise data center, allowing connection between various networks such as servers, WAN Edge, CX (Cloud eXchange), etc.

Features

Cloud LAN-Data Center provides the following functions.

  • Rapid Network Access: When building a network environment in the Samsung Cloud Platform region or the customer’s on-premises data center, a fast and secure corporate customized data center network configuration is possible through the SDDC-based infrastructure.
  • Cost Optimization: Through the logical configuration of virtualized infrastructure and optimization design by experts, it is possible to build a customer-dedicated network with the same effect as building a high-cost physical network infrastructure alone. The cost of building a physical environment, such as network equipment, data center facilities, and cabling, is reduced through the virtual network environment.
  • Operational Persistence: Provides a customized operating environment for each company by maintaining existing settings such as network security policies, IP systems, and network protocols required in various on-premises environments of enterprises.
  • Flexible network environment provision: In the SDDC-based infrastructure, the separation of edge nodes (external network connection), service nodes (built-in equipment connection), and computing nodes (server connection) allows for the accommodation of not only physical security devices and network solution devices that require physical installation in the data center, but also virtualized devices.
Configuration Diagram
Figure. Cloud LAN-Data Center Configuration Diagram

Provided Features

Cloud LAN - Data Center provides the following functions.

  • Various network connection virtualization: Provides virtualization resources for flexible N/W configuration and allows customers to configure a dedicated network through various types of vDevices.
  • Network/Security Solution Integration: It provides virtualization solutions in the form of NFV, and can configure a network by connecting various types of appliances.

Component

Cloud LAN-Data Center is a service that provides connections between various networks through virtual network configuration within the data center. The components are as follows, and related service creation is possible.

DivisionDetailed Content
Cloud LAN NetworkCloud LAN-Data Center infrastructure within a logically separated network configuration for virtual space
vRoutervirtual resource for external line (L2, L3) connection
vSwitchVirtual resource for customer dedicated H/W connection and VLAN provision
vFirewallCloud LAN-Data Center internally created infrastructure protection for virtual firewall
vL4/L7Cloud LAN-Data Center internal traffic load balancing for virtual L4/L7 switch
vCoreVirtual resource for Full Mesh routing connection
vCablevirtual Cable for routing connections between virtual resources
InterfaceProvides a physical interface where H/W devices and lines can be connected to vDevice
Fig. Cloud LAN-Data Center Components

Constraints

When using the Cloud LAN-Data Center service, there are the following restrictions.

  • The available creation capacity by region is 1:1, please inquire.

Regional Provision Status

Cloud LAN-Data Center is available in the following environment.

RegionAvailability
Western Korea(kr-west1)Provided
South Korea, southern region 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea, southern region 3(kr-south3)Not provided
Table. Cloud LAN-Data Center Region-based Provision Status

Preceding Service

Cloud LAN-Data Center has no preceding service.

9.2 - How-to guides

The user can input the essential information of the Cloud LAN Network service and create the service by selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Cloud LAN Network

You can create and use the Cloud LAN Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
Cloud LAN Network can be applied up to a maximum of 5.

To request the creation of a Cloud LAN Network service, follow the procedure below.

  1. All services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.

  2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create Cloud LAN Network button. It moves to the Create Cloud LAN Network page.

  3. Cloud LAN Network Creation page, enter the corresponding information in the service information input area and click the Complete button.

    • Please enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
    Division
    Necessity
    Detailed Description
    Cloud LAN Network namerequiredEnter the name of the Cloud LAN Network to be created
    • Enter 3-21 characters using English, numbers, and special characters
    Cloud LAN Network locationrequiredSelect Cloud LAN Network location
    DescriptionSelectionEnter additional information or description for Cloud LAN Network service
    Table. Cloud LAN Network Service Information Input Items
  • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the necessary information.
    Classification
    Mandatory
    Detailed Description
    TagSelectAdd Tag
    • Up to 50 can be added per resource
    • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
    Fig. Cloud LAN Network Additional Information Input Items
  1. Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Cloud LAN Network list page.

Cloud LAN Network detailed information check

Cloud LAN Network service allows you to check and modify the list of connected resources and detailed information. The Cloud LAN Network details page consists of details, connected resources, tags, and operation history tabs.

To check the detailed information of Cloud LAN Network, follow the next procedure.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu is clicked. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. Move to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
  3. Cloud LAN Network list page, click the resource to check the detailed information. Move to the Cloud LAN Network details page.
    • Cloud LAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      Service StatusService Status Display
      • Creating: Being created
      • Active: In operation
      • Deleting: Being deleted
      • Failed: Creation/deletion failed
      Service CancellationService Cancellation Button
      Fig. Cloud LAN Network status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Cloud LAN Network list page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Title
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
CreatorService creator user
Creation TimeThe time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modified TimeTime the service was modified
Service InformationDetailed information of the created service
  • Click the Edit icon of the description to modify
Fig. Cloud LAN Network Detailed Information Tab Items

Connected Resources

You can check the vDevice information assigned to the selected resource on the Cloud LAN Network list page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
vDevice listDisplays vDevice information and status assigned to the created service
Fig. Cloud LAN Network Connected Resources Tab Detailed Information Items

Tag

On the Cloud LAN Network list page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag ListTag List
  • Check Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the existing list of created Key and Value
Fig. Cloud LAN Network Tags Tab Items

Work History

You can check the operation history of the selected resource on the Cloud LAN Network list page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Work history listResource change history
  • Check work date, resource ID, resource name, work details, event topic, work result, and worker information
Fig. Cloud LAN Network Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Cloud LAN Network Cancellation

To cancel the Cloud LAN Network, follow the procedure below.

Caution
  • If other resources are connected to Cloud LAN Network, the service cannot be terminated. Please delete all connected resources and then terminate the service.
  • Cloud LAN Network service status is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be cancelled.
  • If you cancel the Cloud LAN Network service, it will be deleted immediately and cannot be recovered. If you cancel the service, the service in operation may be stopped immediately, so please proceed with the cancellation work after fully considering the impact that may occur when the service is stopped.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. It moves to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
  3. Cloud LAN Network list page, click on the resource to check the detailed information. It moves to the Cloud LAN Network details page.
  4. Cloud LAN Network details page, click the cancel service button.
  5. When the cancellation is complete, check if the resource has been deleted from the Cloud LAN Network list.

9.2.1 - vDevice

The user can enter the necessary information for the vDevice service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service by selecting detailed options.

Create vDevice

You can create and use the vDevice service on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
  • To apply for a vDevice, a Cloud LAN Network must be created. Please check the Cloud LAN Network information before applying for a vDevice.
  • The detailed settings of the created vDevice use a separate operation platform (NiO). For inquiries about NiO, please contact us through Support Center > Inquiry and we will guide you.

To request the creation of a vDevice service, follow the procedure below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice creation button. It moves to the vDevice creation page.
  3. vDevice creation page, please enter the corresponding information in the service information input area.
    • Please enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      Cloud LAN Network nameRequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign to vDevice
      vDevice TyperequiredSelect the type of vDevice to create
      • vRouter: virtual resource for external line (L2, L3) connection
      • vSwitch: virtual resource for customer dedicated hardware connection and VLAN provision
      • vFirewall: virtual firewall for protecting infrastructure created in Data Center
      • vCore: resource connection service for full-mesh communication between virtual resources
      • vL4/L7: virtual L4/L7 switch for traffic load balancing in Cloud LAN-Data Center
      vDevice Type > vRouterrequiredEnter the name to be created when selecting vRouter
      • Enter 3-21 characters using English, numbers, and special characters
      vDevice Type > vSwitchrequiredEnter the name to be created when selecting vSwitch
      • Enter 3-21 characters using English, numbers, and special characters
      vDevice Type > vFirewallrequiredvFirewall selection creates selection information
      • vFirewall: enter the name to be created
      • Vendor: select vendor
      • Type: select the rate system of the selected vendor
      • Redundancy: select whether to use redundancy, use selects the fee for 2 firewalls, and non-use applies for a single configuration
      • Log storage option: select whether to use the log storage option, logs are stored on 1 server, and even if redundancy is selected, only the fee for 1 server is charged
      • Contract period: select the contract period
      vDevice Type > vCoreRequiredEnter the name to be created when selecting vCore
      • Enter 3-21 characters using English, numbers, and special characters
      vDevice Type > vL4/L7RequiredWhen selecting vL4/L7, select creation information
      • vL4/L7 name: Enter the name to be created
      • Unit: Enter the number of units to be used within 1-20
      • Redundancy: Select whether to use firewall redundancy
      • Contract period: Select the contract period
      Table. vDevice Service Information Input Items
      Note

      When applying for vFirewall, the Firewall Interface is automatically created. The detailed information of the firewall by vendor is as follows.

      VendorFirewall typeNumber of InterfacesCreated vFirewall Interface
      SECUI6 Gbs, 5,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
      SECUI12 Gbs, 15,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
      SECUI30 Gbs, 30,000 Rules4int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2
      SECUI60 Gbs, 100,000 Rules5int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2 / dmz.3
      Fortinet1 Gbs, 1,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
      Table. Detailed Firewall Information by Vendor
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the necessary information.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      TagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
      Table. Input items for adding vDevice information
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, then click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the vDevice list page.

vDevice detailed information check

The vDevice service allows you to check and modify the list of connected resources and detailed information. The vDevice details page consists of detailed information, connected resources, tags, and operation history tabs.

To check the vDevice details, follow the next procedure.

  1. Click all services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. It moves to the vDevice list page.
  3. vDevice list page, click on the resource to check the detailed information. Move to the vDevice details page.
    • vDevice details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of details, connected resources, tags, operation history tabs.
      DivisionDetailed Description
      Service StatusService Status Display
      • Creating: Being created
      • Active: In operation
      • Deleting: Being deleted
      • Failed: Creation/deletion failed
      vDevice deletionservice deletion button
      Table. vDevice Status Information and Additional Functions

Detailed Information

vDevice List page where you can view detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Title
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
CreatorThe user who created the service
Creation TimeTime when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modified DateDate the service was modified
Service InformationDetailed service information created
  • Items displayed vary depending on the creation type
Table. vDevice detailed information tab items

Connected Resources

You can check the resources assigned to the selected resource on the vDevice list page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Connected Resource ListDetailed information and status of resources assigned to the created service
  • Items displayed vary depending on the creation type
Table. vDevice connected resource tab detailed information items

Tag

On the vDevice list page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag listTag list
  • Key, Value information of the tag can be checked
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the existing Key and Value list
Table. vDevice tag tab items

Work History

You can check the operation history of the resource selected on the vDevice list page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Work history listResource change history
  • Check work time, resource ID, resource name, work details, event topic, work result, and worker information
Table. vDevice task history tab detailed information items

vDevice cancellation

To cancel the vDevice, follow the procedure below.

Caution
If other resources are connected to the vDevice, the service cannot be terminated. Please delete all connected resources and then terminate the service.
  1. All services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click. Move to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. Move to the vDevice list page.
  3. Click on the resource to check the detailed information on the vDevice list page. It moves to the vDevice details page.
  4. vDevice details page, click the vDevice delete button.
  5. When the cancellation is complete, check if the resource has been deleted from the vDevice list.

9.2.2 - Interface

The user can enter the required information of the Interface service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service by selecting detailed options.

Create Interface

You can create and use the Interface service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
  • To apply for the Interface, Cloud LAN Network and vDevice must be created. Please check the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information before applying for the Interface.
  • Interface is a function that assigns a physical port to a pre-created vDevice. Interface can only be applied to vRouter and vSwitch.
  • vFirewall is automatically created with the number of interfaces specified in the specification when created.

To request the creation of an Interface service, follow the next procedure.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.

  2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create Interface button. It moves to the Create Interface page.

  3. Interface creation page, please enter the corresponding information in the service information input area.

    • Please enter or select the necessary information in the service information input area.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      Cloud LAN Network namerequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign the Interface
      vDevice TypeRequiredSelect the type of vDevice to use
      • vRouter: virtual resource for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
      • vSwitch: virtual resource for customer dedicated hardware connection and VLAN provision
      vDevice Type detailsrequiredSelect detailed information of vDevice type
      • vDevice name: Select vDevice
      • Interface Type: Select the type of Interface to use
      • Interface name: Enter the Interface name
      • Up to 5 Interface items can be added, click the (+) button to add an item, click the (x) button to delete an item
      • Interface redundancy: Set whether to use Interface redundancy, if redundancy is selected, the fee for 2 ports will be charged
      • Contract period: Select the desired contract period
      Table. Interface service information input items
    • Enter Additional Information Enter or select the required information in the area.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      TagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
      Table. Input items for additional interface information
  4. In the Summary panel, check the detailed information generated and the expected billing amount, and click the Complete button.

    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Interface list page.

Interface detailed information check

The Interface service allows you to check and modify the list of connected resources and detailed information. The Interface details page consists of details, tags, and work history tabs.

To check the interface details, follow the next procedure.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. It moves to the Interface list page.
  3. Interface List page, click on the resource to check the detailed information. Move to the Interface Detail page.
    • Interface Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Info, Tags, Work History tabs.
      ClassificationDetailed Description
      Service StatusService Status Display
      • Creating: Being created
      • Active: In operation
      • Deleting: Being deleted
      • Failed: Creation/deletion failed
      Interface deletionService deletion button
      Table. Interface Status Information and Additional Functions

Detailed Information

On the Interface List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Title
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
CreatorThe user who created the service
Creation TimeTime when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modified DateDate the service was modified
vDevice TypevDevice Type information
Virtual Device NameVirtual Device Name
Interface TypeInterface Type Information
Port DuplicationWhether to use port duplication
Contract PeriodSelected Contract Period
Table. Interface detailed information tab items

Tag

On the Interface List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag listTag list
  • Check Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • Search and select from existing Key and Value lists when entering tags
Table. Interface tag tab items

Work History

You can check the work history of the resource selected on the Interface list page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Work history listResource change history
  • Check work date, resource ID, resource name, work details, event topic, work result, and worker information
Table. Interface work history tab detailed information items

Interface cancellation

To cancel the interface, follow the next procedure.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu is clicked. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. Move to the Interface list page.
  3. Interface List page, click on the resource to check the detailed information. Move to the Interface Detail page.
  4. Interface details page, click the Interface delete button.
  5. When the cancellation is complete, check if the resource has been deleted from the Interface list.

9.2.3 - vCable

The user can enter the necessary information for the vCable service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service by selecting detailed options.

Create vCable

You can create and use the vCable service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
  • To apply for vCable, Cloud LAN Network and vDevice must be created. Please check the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information before applying for vCable.
  • Only vCable configuration between vDevices created in the same Cloud LAN Network is possible.

To request the creation of a vCable service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu is clicked. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable creation button. Move to the vCable creation page.
  3. vCable creation page, please enter the corresponding information in the service information input area.
    • Please enter or select the necessary information in the service information input area.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      Cloud LAN Network namerequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign vCable
      vCable TypeRequiredSelect the type of vCable to be created
      • Static: Provides 1:1 connection between vDevices, when setting vDevice A and vDevice B, different virtual resources are selected
      • vCore: Provides multi-peering between vDevices, connects multiple vDevices to provide connections between vDevices
      vCable Type > detailsrequiredEnter detailed information according to vCable Type
      • vCable name: Enter the name of the vCable to be created
      • vDevice A: Select vDevice A
      • vDevice B: Select vDevice B
      • Select vDevice A and B in sequence, if vFirewall Interface is selected from A list, it will not be displayed in B list
      • If vCable Type is Static, vCore cannot be selected from vDevice A and vDevice B
      • If vCable Type is vCore, vCore can only be selected from vDevice A
      • vDevice can only be connected to 1 vCable
      • vFirewall can be connected to vCable using vFirewall Interface
      Table. vCable Service Information Input Items
    • Enter Additional Information Enter or select the required information in the area.
      Classification
      Necessity
      Detailed Description
      TagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
      Table. Additional information input items for vCable
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the vCable list page.

Check vCable detailed information

The vCable service can check and modify the list of connected resources and detailed information. The vCable details page consists of detailed information, tags, and work history tabs.

To check the vCable details, follow the next procedure.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. It moves to the vCable list page.
  3. vCable list page, click the resource to check the detailed information. Move to the vCable detail page.
    • vCable Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
      ClassificationDetailed Description
      Service StatusService Status Display
      • Creating: Being created
      • Active: In operation
      • Deleting: Being deleted
      • Failed: Creation/deletion failed
      vCable deleteservice delete button
      Table. vCable Status Information and Additional Functions

Detailed Information

On the vCable List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Title
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
CreatorService creator user
Creation TimeThe time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modified TimeTime the service was modified
vDevice TypevDevice Type Category
vDevice A namevDevice A name
vDevice B namevDevice B title
Table. vCable detailed information tab items

Tag

On the vCable List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag listTag list
  • Check Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search and select from the existing Key and Value list
Table. vCable tag tab items

Work History

You can check the operation history of the selected resource on the vCable List page.

DivisionDetailed Description
Work history listResource change history
  • Check work time, resource ID, resource name, work details, event topic, work result, and worker information
Table. vCable job history tab detailed information items

Canceling vCable

To cancel vCable, follow the procedure below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu is clicked. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
  2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. It moves to the vCable list page.
  3. vCable list page, click on the resource to check the detailed information. It moves to the vCable details page.
  4. vCable details page, click the vCable delete button.
  5. Once the cancellation is complete, please check if the resource has been deleted from the vCable list.

9.2.4 - vEdge

Users can apply for the vEdge service by entering the necessary information for using the service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create vEdge

You can apply for and use the vEdge service on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a vEdge service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu is clicked. It moves to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the vEdge service request button. It moves to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

  3. Service Request page, please enter or select the corresponding information in the required input area.

    • Select vEdge creation in the work division.
      Input ItemDetailed Description
      TitleEnter the title of the service request content
      • Example: vEdge service creation request
      RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Automatically entered as the region corresponding to the Account
      ServiceSelect service category and service. If the vEdge service request button is pressed, it is automatically entered
      • Service category: Networking
      • Service: vEdge
      Work classificationSelect the type you want to request
      • vEdge creation: Select if you are newly requesting a service
      Contents and guidance on the service application process and notes
      AttachmentsIf you have files you want to share with others, proceed with uploading
      • Attached files can be up to 5MB each, with a maximum of 5 files
      • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
      Table. vEdge Service Creation Request Items
  4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page and click the Request button. When the application is complete, check the contents of the application on the Support Center > Service Request List page.

Check vEdge Application History

You can check the application and cancellation history of the vEdge service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To check the vEdge service application history, follow the procedure below.

  1. Click all services > Management > Support Center menu. It moves to the Support Center > Service Home page.
  2. Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. It moves to the Service Request List page.
  3. On the Service Request List page, click the title of the service request you applied for. It moves to the Service Request Details page.
  4. Service Request Details page to check the application status and information.
Notice
When a service request is received, the sales/operations manager checks the service application details and proceeds with the vEdge service based on the entered information.

vEdge cancellation

To request the cancellation of the vEdge service, follow the procedure below.

  1. Click all services > Management > Support Center menu. It moves to the Support Center > Service Home page.

  2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. It moves to the Service Request List page.

  3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. It moves to the Service Request page.

  4. Service Request page, enter or select the corresponding information in the required input field.

    • Select vEdge Cancellation in the work classification.
      Input ItemDetailed Description
      TitleEnter the title of the service request content
      • Example: vEdge service cancellation request
      RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Automatically entered as the region corresponding to the account
      ServiceSelect service category and service
      • Service Category: Networking
      • Service: vEdge
      Work classificationSelect the type you want to request
      • vEdge cancellation: Select if you want to cancel the service
      ContentGuide to service application process and notes
      AttachmentIf you have additional files you want to share, upload them
      • Attached files can be up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
      • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
      Table. vEdge Service Cancellation Request Items
  5. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page and click the Request button.

    • Once the application is complete, check the contents of the application on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    • Service cancellation takes 5-7 business days from the date of cancellation application, including the cancellation application date.

9.3 - Release Note

Cloud LAN-Data Center

2025.07.01
NEW Cloud LAN-Data Center common feature changes
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature change
    • Account, IAM and Service Home, tags, etc. reflected common CX changes.
2025.02.27
NEW Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Official Launch
  • We have launched the Cloud LAN-Data Center service, which provides connections between various networks through virtual network configuration within the data center.

10 - Cloud WAN

10.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Cloud WAN is a service that provides network connections between Samsung Cloud Platform global regions and customer bases. This product provides services based on network traffic usage, and provides differentiated operation management services according to the selected service level.

Cloud WAN service consists of Cloud WAN Network, which is a customer virtual backbone, Segment, which provides logical network separation by purpose, and Attachment, which connects Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources or receives a dedicated line from the customer’s business site and connects it to the Segment.

For example, to configure a backbone network connection from a system in the Samsung Cloud Platform region to a customer’s overseas base, the following settings are required in the user console. First, create a customer virtual backbone Cloud WAN Network. Next, select the access location, service level, and contract period to create a segment that suits the purpose. Then, by connecting the attachment to the segment in the relevant region or customer base, the backbone network between the relevant SCP region and the customer base is connected, allowing communication between them.

Service Composition Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Cloud WAN Configuration Diagram

Provided Features

Cloud WAN provides the following features.

  • Rapid Backbone Network Configuration: Samsung Cloud Platform customers can select their desired hub location and create a virtual global backbone network to quickly and securely configure cloud networks between Samsung Cloud Platform regions and customer hubs, and between customer hubs.
  • Various Network Edge Connection Types Provided: Various Edge types that can be connected to Cloud WAN are provided, so Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources can be connected as Transit Gateway, and local lines of customer’s business site can be connected as Site Connect, making it convenient.
  • Multi-path transmission selection function for cost optimization: Unlike existing circuit bandwidth-based backbone network line services, customers are only charged for the actual usage in the desired section, and traffic characteristic-based transmission path options (Gold/Silver) are provided to optimize line costs.
  • Service Level-Based Operation Management: Customers can receive differentiated network operation management services according to the selected service level, including the form of Cloud WAN backbone transmission network utilization, provided functions, monitoring, fault management, and technical support levels.

Component

Cloud WAN service provides a global customer virtual backbone network. The components are as follows, and users can create resources directly through the user Console.

DivisionDetailed Description
Cloud WAN NetworkCustomer-specific virtual backbone network
SegmentCloud WAN Network by use case, logically separated virtual routing domain
  • Access Location, service level, contract period, multi-path option selection
Access LocationLocation of physical points to form a Segment
AttachmentConnect Samsung Cloud Platform or customer’s dedicated line Edge resources
Transit GatewaySamsung Cloud Platform Compute resources connection type for Edge connection
Site ConnectEdge connection type for connecting customer business site dedicated line resources (CE equipment)
CE equipmentNetwork equipment that receives a dedicated line for customer business sites (Customer Edge)
Segment SharingProvides routing exchange settings to enable mutual communication between resources connected to different segments
Fig. Cloud WAN Configuration Components

Constraints

The Cloud WAN service has the following restrictions.

  • You can create one Cloud WAN Network per Account.
  • You can create up to 5 segments in a single Cloud WAN Network.
  • You can create up to 50 attachments in one segment.
  • You can create up to 10 Segment Sharings in one Segment.
  • Connection between Segment and Attachment is only allowed within the same project through request/approval.
  • However, Segment Sharing can also be connected between different projects through requests and approvals.

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating this service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingTransit GatewayA service that safely and quickly connects Samsung Cloud Platform’s Compute resources to Cloud WAN Segment
Fig. Cloud WAN Preceding Service

10.1.1 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud WAN Monitoring Metrics

The following table shows the monitoring metrics of Cloud WAN that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed Cloud Monitoring usage, please refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Instance StatusAttachment connection statusstatus
Network in bytesIn bytes(per cycle inbound traffic usage)bytes
Network In Error PacketsIn Error Packet count (number of received error packets per cycle)Cnt
Network In Packets [Broadcast]In Broadcast Packet count (number of broadcast packets per cycle)Cnt
Network In Packets [Dropped]In Dropped Packet count (number of Dropped packets per cycle)Cnt
Network In Packets [Multicast]In Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle)Cnt
Network In Packets [Unicast]In Unicast Packet count (number of Unicast packets per cycle)Cnt
Network out bytesOut bytes(per cycle outbound traffic usage)bytes
Network Out Error PacketsOut Error Packet count (number of transmission error packets per cycle)Cnt
Network Out Packets [Broadcast]Out Broadcast Packet count (number of broadcast packets per cycle)Cnt
Network Out Packets [Dropped]Out Dropped Packet count (number of dropped packets per cycle)Cnt
Network Out Packets [Multicast]Out Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle)Cnt
Network Out Packets [Unicast]Out Unicast Packet count (number of Unicast packets per cycle)Cnt
Fig. Cloud WAN Basic Monitoring Metrics

10.2 - How-to guides

The user can create a service by entering the essential information of Cloud WAN and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Cloud WAN Network

You can create a Cloud WAN Network through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
Only one Cloud WAN Network can be applied per account.

To create a Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
  2. Click the Create Cloud WAN Network button on the Service Home page. It moves to the Create Cloud WAN Network page.
  3. Enter the necessary information and select detailed options on the Create Cloud WAN Network page.
    • Enter the necessary information in the Service Information section.
Category
Required
Detailed Description
Cloud WAN Network NameRequiredEnter the name of the Cloud WAN Network to be created
  • Enter 3-20 characters using English letters and numbers
Table. Cloud WAN Network Service Information Input Items
  • Enter additional information in the Additional Information section.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed Description
    DescriptionOptionalEnter a description of the resource
    TagOptionalAdd a tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    Table. Cloud WAN Network Additional Information Input Items
  1. Confirm the service information and estimated billing amount in the summary panel, and click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, confirm the created resource on the Cloud WAN Network List page.

Checking Cloud WAN Network Details

The Cloud WAN Network service can be checked and modified on the Cloud WAN Network menu. The Cloud WAN Network Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, and Operation History tabs.

To check the details of the Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
  2. Click the Cloud WAN Network menu on the Service Home page. It moves to the Cloud WAN Network List page.
  3. Click the resource to check the details on the Cloud WAN Network List page. It moves to the Cloud WAN Network Details page.
    • The Cloud WAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, and Operation History tabs.
CategoryDetailed Description
StatusCurrent service status
  • Creating: Service application in progress
  • Active: Service operating normally
  • Deleting: Service cancellation request in progress
  • Failed: Service failure status
  • Error: Service status cannot be checked
Service CancellationService cancellation button
  • The Cloud WAN Network can be cancelled if there are no connected services
Table. Cloud WAN Network Status Information and Additional Features

Details

The Details tab displays detailed information about the selected Cloud WAN Network.

CategoryDetailed Description
ServiceService category
Resource TypeService name (Cloud WAN Network)
SRNUnique ID of the resource in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique ID of the resource in the service
CreatorUser who requested service creation
Creation TimeService creation time
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Modification TimeService modification time
Cloud WAN Network NameCloud WAN Network name
Number of SegmentsNumber of segments used
DescriptionDescription of the service
Table. Cloud WAN Network Details Tab Items

Connected Resources

The Connected Resources tab displays the Segment connection status information.

CategoryDetailed Description
Segment NameSegment resource name
Segment IDSegment ID Information
StatusService Resource Status Information
Table. Cloud WAN Network Connected Resource Tab Items

Tags

In the Tags tab, you can view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the selected resource.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Key, Value information of the tag can be checked
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the existing Key and Value list
Table. Cloud WAN Network Tag Tab Items

Operation History

In the Operation History tab, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Work time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, worker name, and path information can be checked
  • To perform a detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. Cloud WAN Network Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Canceling Cloud WAN Network

Canceling an unused Cloud WAN Network can help reduce operating costs.

Note
  • If there are resources connected to the Cloud WAN Network, the service cannot be canceled. Delete the connected resources first and then cancel the service.
  • If the service status of the Cloud WAN Network is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be canceled.

To cancel a Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN. The Cloud WAN Service Home page will be displayed.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Cloud WAN Network. The Cloud WAN Network List page will be displayed.
  3. On the Cloud WAN Network List page, click the resource to be canceled. The Cloud WAN Network Details page will be displayed.
  4. On the Cloud WAN Network Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. After cancellation is complete, check the resource cancellation status on the Cloud WAN Network List.

Creating a Segment

You can create a Segment on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it.

Note
A maximum of 5 Segments can be applied per Cloud WAN Network.

To create a Segment, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN. The Cloud WAN Service Home page will be displayed.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Segment button in the drop-down menu. The Create Segment page will be displayed.
  3. On the Create Segment page, enter the necessary information for service creation and select detailed options.
    • In the Service Information Input section, enter or select the necessary information.
Classification
Mandatory
Detailed Description
Cloud WAN Network NameMandatorySelect a Cloud WAN Network
  • Click +New Creation to create a Cloud WAN Network and select it
Segment NameOptionalEnter a Segment name and click the Duplicate Check button
Access LocationMandatorySelect a location to connect the Segment
  • Only one Access Location can be selected
  • In the Detailed Information > Connected Resources tab, one Access Location can be added
  • Access Locations can be added up to the number of Cloud WAN service provision points
Service TypeMandatorySelect the Segment service type
  • Select the usage area (Global)
  • ※ Global is for connection between domestic and overseas regions
  • Select the service level (PremiumPlusG)
  • ※ Professional TAM designation and advanced technical support services are provided
  • Select the contract period (None, 3 years, 5 years, 7 years)
  • ※ The contract discount rate is automatically applied according to the contract period
Multiple PathsOptionalSelect multiple transmission paths (to be provided from December 25)
  • Basic path: Gold (3-way structure, important tasks)
  • Optional path: Silver (2-way structure, general)
Table. Segment Service Information Input Items
  • In the Additional Information Input section, enter or select the necessary information.
    Classification
    Mandatory
    Detailed Description
    DescriptionOptionalEnter a description of the Segment
    TagOptionalAdd a tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    Table. Segment Additional Information Input Items
  1. In the summary panel, check the service information and estimated billing amount, and click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Segment List page.
Note

After creating a Segment, set the following in the Detailed Information > Connected Resources tab:

  • Connect an Attachment created in the same Account to the Segment.
  • To connect between different Accounts, set Segment Sharing.

Checking Segment Details

A Segment can be checked in the Segment menu, where you can view the entire resource list and detailed information, and modify it. The Segment Details page consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Multiple Paths, Tags, and Operation History tabs.

To check the detailed information of a Segment, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN. The Cloud WAN Service Home page will be displayed.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Segment. The Segment List page will be displayed.
  3. On the Segment List page, click the resource to check the detailed information. The Segment Details page will be displayed.
    • The Segment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Multiple Paths, Tags, and Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed Description
      StatusCurrent service status
      • Creating: Service creation in progress
      • Active: Service operating normally
      • Deleting: Service deletion request in progress
      • Failed: Service creation failed status
      • Error: Unknown error occurred in the service
      Service DeletionService deletion button
      • If there are no connected services, the Segment can be deleted
      Table. Segment Status Information and Additional Function Items

Detailed Information

The Detailed Information tab allows you to view detailed information about the selected Segment.

CategoryDetailed Description
ServiceService category
Resource TypeService name (Segment name)
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who requested service creation
Creation TimeService creation time
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Modification TimeService modification time
Segment NameSegment name
Access Location CountNumber of Access Locations connected to the Segment
RegionSelected usage region (global, domestic)
  • Domestic is currently not provided
Service LevelSelected service level (PremiumPlusG, LIteG)
  • LIteG is currently not provided
Contract PeriodService usage contract period
  • Discount rate applied according to contract period
Attachment CountNumber of Attachments connected to the Segment
Multi-PathTransmission path option (Gold/Silver) selected for the Segment
  • Available from December 25th
DescriptionDescription of the Segment
Table. Segment Detailed Information Tab Items

Connected Resources

The Connected Resources tab allows you to view the connection status of Access Locations, Segment Sharing, and Attachments.

CategoryDetailed Description
Access LocationView location information connected to the Segment
  • Click Add to add an Access Location item
  • Click Delete to delete the selected Access Location item
  • If an Attachment or multi-path rule is connected to the selected Access Location, it cannot be deleted; delete the connected resource first
  • If only one Access Location is set for the Segment, it cannot be deleted; at least one Access Location must be set
Segment SharingRequest Segment Sharing connection between projects
  • Click Create Sharing to add a Segment sharing item
  • Sharing creation is only possible between the same service levels
  • Click Approve in the list to approve the connection request
  • Click Delete to delete the selected item
Attachment ConnectionRequest Attachment connection from the same project to the Segment
  • Click Approve in the list to approve the connection request
  • Samsung Cloud Platform’s Transit Gateway must be pre-created in the Transit Gateway menu and connected to the Attachment (*Transit Gateway Attachment will be available from December 25th)
Table. Segment Connected Resources Tab Items

Multi-Path

The Multi-Path tab allows you to add or delete multi-path rules.

Note
The multi-path feature will be available from December 25th.

Adding Multi-Path Rules

To add a multi-path rule, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN. The Cloud WAN Service Home page will be displayed.
  2. Click the Segment menu on the Service Home page. The Segment List page will be displayed.
  3. Click the resource you want to view detailed information about on the Segment List page. The Segment Details page will be displayed.
  4. Click the Multi-Path tab on the Segment Details page.
  5. Click the Add Rule button on the Multi-Path tab page. A rule addition popup window will appear.
  6. Enter detailed information in the popup window and click Confirm.
Category
Required
Detailed Description
Source Access LocationRequiredSelect the source location information for the multi-path rule
Source IP RangeRequiredEnter the source IP range
  • Enter the IP address in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
Destination IP RangeRequiredEnter the destination IP range
  • Enter the IP address in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
  • Both source and destination IP ranges cannot be set to 0.0.0.0/0
ProtocolOptionalSelect the protocol
Port DirectionOptionalSelect the port direction for the selected protocol
Port NumberOptionalEnter the port number if TCP or UDP protocol is selected
  • Allowed range: 1 - 65,535
  • Enter up to 5 port numbers separated by commas (e.g., 80, 443)
DescriptionOptionalEnter a description for the multi-path rule
Table. Multi-Path Rule Addition Input Items
Caution
  • If you enter the same information as an existing rule, you cannot register it as a new multi-path rule.
  • You can apply for up to 20 multi-path rules.

Viewing Multi-Path Rules

To view multi-path rules, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN. The Cloud WAN Service Home page will be displayed.
  2. Click the Segment menu on the Service Home page. The Segment List page will be displayed.
  3. Click the resource you want to view detailed information about on the Segment List page. The Segment Details page will be displayed.
  4. Click the Multi-Path tab on the Segment Details page.
  5. View the detailed information on the Multi-Path tab page.
CategoryDetailed Description
Origin Access LocationOrigin location information for multi-path rules
Origin IP RangeOrigin IP range
Destination IP RangeDestination IP range
ProtocolProtocol information
Port DirectionPort direction of the protocol
Port NumberPort number for TCP, UDP protocols
DescriptionDescription of multi-path rules
Table. Detailed information items for multi-path rules
Note

You can search by setting search filters by clicking the Detailed Search button on the right side of the rule list.

  • You can quickly check multi-rules by searching with the desired filter among origin access location, origin IP, destination IP, and description.

Deleting Multi-Path Rules

To delete a multi-path rule, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. Move to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
  2. Click the Segment menu on the Service Home page. Move to the Segment List page.
  3. Click the resource to be checked in detail on the Segment List page. Move to the Segment Detail page.
  4. Click the Multi-Path tab on the Segment Detail page.
  5. Click the Delete button on the Multi-Path tab page. The rule will be deleted.

Tags

In the Tags tab, you can check the tag information of the selected resource and add, change, or delete it.

DivisionDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Key, Value information of the tag can be checked
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the existing Key and Value list
Table. Segment tag tab items

Work History

In the Work History tab, you can check the work history of the selected resource.

DivisionDetailed Description
Work History ListResource change history
  • Work time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, worker name, and path information can be checked
  • To perform a detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. Segment work history tab detailed information items

Deleting a Segment

Deleting an unused Segment can reduce operating costs.

Caution
  • If there is an Attachment connected to the Segment or Segment sharing, multi-path rules, it cannot be deleted. Delete the connected resources first and then cancel the service.
  • The service cannot be deleted if the service status of the Segment is Creating, Deleting, Inactive, or Failed.

To delete a Segment, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. Move to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
  2. Click the Segment menu on the Service Home page. Move to the Segment List page.
  3. Click the resource to be deleted on the Segment List page. Move to the Segment Detail page.
  4. Click the Service Delete button on the Segment Detail page.
  5. After deletion is complete, check if the resource is deleted in the Segment List.

Creating an Attachment

You can create an Attachment service using the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
Up to 50 Attachments can be applied per Segment.

To create an Attachment, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. Move to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
  2. Click the Attachment Creation button on the Service Home page. Move to the Attachment Creation page.
  3. Enter the necessary information for service creation and select detailed options on the Attachment Creation page.
    • In the Service Information Input section, enter or select the necessary information.

Division
Required
Detailed Description
Cloud WAN Network NameRequiredSelect the Cloud WAN Network to apply for the Attachment
  • Click +New Creation to create and select a Cloud WAN Network
Segment NameOptionalSelect the Segment to connect the Attachment
  • Click +New Creation to create and select a Segment
Access LocationRequiredSelect the location connected to the Segment
Connection TypeRequiredSet detailed connection information for Site Connect
  • Attachment Name: Enter the Attachment name and click Duplicate Check
  • ASN Information: Enter ASN information within the range of 1-65,534
  • Note that 65,001 cannot be used
  • Port Capacity: Select the port capacity
  • When connecting to Site Connect, additional work is performed on the customer’s CE router and SR, and it takes several days for the final connection
Connection TypeRequiredSelect a connectable Transit Gateway (available from December 25)
  • If you select an Access Location with Multi-AZ set, only Transit Gateway can be set as the connection type
  • Only Transit Gateway items within the same project are displayed
  • TGW items that already have a TGW Peering connection or an Attachment connection are not displayed in the list
  • If you select a TGW item, the Attachment name is automatically generated
TagOptionalAdd a tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Attachment additional information input items
4. In the summary panel, check the service information and the expected billing amount, and click the Complete button.

  • Once created, check the created resource on the Attachment List page.

Checking Attachment Details

Attachments can be checked and modified in the Attachment menu, which includes a list of all resources and detailed information. The Attachment Details page consists of Details, Tags, and Work History tabs.

To check the details of an attachment, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. This will move to the Cloud WAN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. This will move to the Attachment List page.
  3. On the Attachment List page, click the resource you want to check the details for. This will move to the Attachment Details page.
    • The Attachment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, and Work History tabs.
CategoryDetailed Description
StatusCurrent service status
  • Creating: Service creation in progress
  • Active: Service operating normally
  • Deleting: Service deletion requested
  • Failed: Service creation failed
  • Error: Unknown error occurred in the service
Service DeletionService deletion button
Table. Attachment Status Information and Additional Function Items

Details

The Details tab allows you to check the detailed information of the selected attachment.

CategoryDetailed Description
ServiceService category
Resource TypeService name (Attachment name)
SRNUnique ID of the resource in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique ID of the resource in the service
CreatorUser who requested service creation
Creation TimeService creation time
ModifierUser who requested service modification
Modification TimeService modification time
Attachment NameAttachment name
Segment NameName of the segment connected to the attachment
Access LocationAccess location to be connected to the attachment
Connection TypeAttachment connection type (Site Connect or Transit Gateway)
ASN InformationIf Site Connect is selected, the AS Number entered by the user
  • Set to a value within the range of 1 to 65,534, and 65,001 is not available
DescriptionDescription of the attachment
Table. Attachment Details Tab Items

Tags

In the Tags tab, you can check the tag information of the selected resource and add, change, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Key, Value information of the tag can be checked
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of existing keys and values
Table. Attachment Tag Tab Items

Work History

The Work History tab allows you to check the work history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed Description
Work History ListResource change history
  • Work time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, worker name, and path information can be checked
  • To perform a detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. Attachment Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Deleting an Attachment

Deleting an unused attachment can help reduce operating costs.

To delete an attachment, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. This will move to the Cloud WAN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. This will move to the Attachment List page.
  3. On the Attachment List page, click the resource you want to delete. This will move to the Attachment Details page.
  4. On the Attachment Details page, click the Service Deletion button.
  5. Once deleted, check if the resource has been deleted on the Attachment List page.

10.3 - Release Note

Cloud WAN

2025.07.01
NEW Cloud WAN Service Official Version Release
  • Samsung Cloud Platform launched Cloud WAN service, providing network connections between global regions and customer bases.

11 - SASE

11.1 - Overview

Service Overview

SASE is a service that integrates network and security functions into the cloud to allow users to safely access internal assets and applications from anywhere. It transmits traffic through the optimal route and provides consistent security services inside and outside the company through SASE hubs located in Samsung Cloud Platform global regions.

Features

  • Global SASE Fabric: Utilizing the systematic Samsung SDS Global communication network infrastructure, SASE points and vPOPs prepared in all regions are linked to continuously expand service coverage whenever customer demands arise.
  • All in One Security: Covers a security layer that includes advanced SSL/TLS analysis, sophisticated application recognition/policy, and AI/ML-based real-time behavior analysis in one solution to optimize operational complexity and performance.
  • Network/Security Unification: Provides network and security in a single operating system based on a single architecture, allowing for rapid traffic processing.
  • End to End Full Managed: provides infrastructure necessary for customer site connection in a package form through a single contract, and provides comprehensive operation services from monitoring to failure notification and reporting.

Service Composition Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. SASE Configuration Diagram
  • SASE Hub: Composed of Gateway and control plane in SamsungSDS Global POP and CSP vPOP to provide network connection and security functions
  • SASE Circuit: Physical circuit for connection between customer site and SASE hub, based on internet/MPLS/dedicated line SD-WAN or VPN configuration
  • SASE Edge: SASE line connection for customer Edge equipment, in-house routers/SD-WAN equipment/VPN equipment, out-of-house PC/mobile etc. customer’s own Endpoint terminal

Provided Features

The SASE service provides the following functions.

  • WAN Edge network
  • Provides Intra, Inter region communication between various Edge devices (SD-WAN devices, routers, VPN devices, PCs, Mobile, etc.)
  • Providing optimal route for each application using SD-WAN
  • Provides traffic control (QoS) and TCP acceleration features for high-quality networks
  • SSE(Secure Service Edge) Security
  • ZTNA : Provide least privilege, security, and private connection to internal applications
  • SWG : Security Gateway that provides internal user protection from insecure traffic such as the internet
  • CASB : Provides a feature to apply corporate security policies between users and cloud applications
  • FWaaS : Cloud-based firewall provides traffic inspection and control for all services
    • Provides additional advanced security features such as RBI, DLP, SANDBOX, etc.
  • Unified Orchestrator and DEM(Digital Experience Monitoring)
  • Integrated network and security management for cloud, on-premises, and Edge devices
  • Monitoring of user experience (recognition and identification of causes of problems such as network performance degradation, app suspension, etc.)

Constraints

The limitations of the SASE service are as follows.

  • The service is not available in China and will be provided later.

Regional Provision Status

SASE can be provided in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Western Korea(kr-west1)Provided
Korean East(kr-east1)Not provided
South Korea, southern region1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea southern region 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea southern region 3(kr-south3)Not provided
Table. SASE Regional Provision Status

Preceding Service

SASE has no preceding service.

11.2 - How-to guides

The user can enter required information for the SASE service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, select detailed options, and create the service.

SASE Create

You can create and use SASE services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request SASE service creation, follow the steps below. ​

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Create SASE button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Create SASE page.
  3. SASE Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.
    • Service Information Input Enter the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required or not
      Detailed description
      SASE nameRequiredSASE name to be used by the user
      • Enter using English letters and numbers, 3-20 characters
      Service LevelRequiredSelect SASE Service Level
      Service TypeRequiredSelect SASE Service Type
      • Agent type: Enter the number of agents to use in increments of 10 within 1-10,000
      • Edge type: Choose whether to use inter-region connections, select the upstream country of the site and connection bandwidth
        • Click + to add up to 10 items, click X to delete an item
      Contract periodRequiredSelect SASE contract period
      Other requestsOptionEnter request when applying for SASE service
      Table. SASE Service Information Input Items
  4. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

SASE Check detailed information

The SASE service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the SASE menu. The SASE Details page consists of Detail Information, Work History tabs.

To view detailed information about SASE, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the SASE menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the SASE List page.
  3. Click the resource to view detailed information on the SASE List page. It navigates to the SASE Details page.
  • SASE Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Work History tabs.
    CategoryDetailed description
    StatusCurrent Service Status
    • Request: Service request in progress
    • Creating: Service registration completed
    • Active: Service approved and successfully created
    • Deleting: Service termination request in progress
    Previous state changePrevious state change button
    • In Creating, Active, Deleting states, can change to previous state
    Service terminationService termination button
    Table. SASE status information and additional function items

Detailed Information

In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the selected SASE.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type (SASE)
SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorService creation request user
Creation Date/TimeService Creation Date/Time
EditorService modification request user
Edit Date/TimeService Edit Date/Time
Service DetailsSASE Service Selection Items
  • Click the edit icon to modify each service detail item
Service LevelSASE Service Level
  • Click the edit icon to modify the service level
Contract periodSASE service contract period
Other requestsSASE service request
  • Click the edit icon to modify the request
Table. SASE detailed information tab items

Work History

Work History tab allows you to view the work history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work History ListResource Change History
  • Work date and time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, and operator name can be checked
  • To perform detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. SASE Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

SASE Cancel

If you cancel unused SASE, you can reduce operating costs.

Caution
If a SASE Lastmile resource is connected, you cannot cancel the SASE service. Please delete the connected SASE Lastmile first.

To cancel SASE, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the SASE menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the SASE List page.
  3. SASE list Click the resource to be terminated on the page. SASE details Navigate to the page.
  4. Click the Service Termination button on the SASE Details page.
  5. Once the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the SASE list.

11.2.1 - SASE Lastmile

The user can enter required information for the SASE Lastmile service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, select detailed options, and create the service.

SASE Lastmile Create

You can create and use the SASE Lastmile service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request SASE Lastmile service creation, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.

  2. Click the SASE Lastmile Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile Create page.

  3. SASE Lastmile Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.

    • Service Information Input Enter the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required or not
      Detailed description
      SASE nameRequiredSelect SASE service to use
      • Click + New creation to create a SASE service and then select it
      SiteRequiredSelect detailed items of SASE Site to use
      • Site name: Select site to use
      • Connection bandwidth, Upper country: Automatically fill selected SASE information
      • Line: Apply then select Line1, Line2
      • Customer Edge: Apply then select Customer Edge1, Customer Edge2
      Table. SASE Lastmile Service Information Input Items
  4. Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the summary panel, and click the Generate button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

SASE Lastmile Check detailed information

SASE Lastmile service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the SASE Lastmile menu. The SASE Lastmile Detail page consists of Detail Information, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information of SASE Lastmile, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the SASE Lastmile menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile list page.
  3. Click the resource to view detailed information on the SASE Lastmile List page. It navigates to the SASE Lastmile Details page.
    • SASE Lastmile Detailed page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Work History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusCurrent Service Status
      • Request: Service request in progress
      • Creating: Service registration completed
      • Active: Service approved and successfully created
      • Deleting: Service termination request in progress
      Previous state changePrevious state change button
      • In Creating, Active, Deleting states, can change to previous state
      SASE Lastmile DeleteService termination button
      Table. SASE Lastmile status information and additional function items

Detailed Information

In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the selected SASE Lastmile.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type (SASE Lastmile)
SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorService creation request user
Creation Date/TimeService Creation Date/Time
EditorService modification request user
Edit Date/TimeService Edit Date/Time
SiteSite configuration information
  • Click the edit icon to modify Site settings
Table. SASE Lastmile detailed information tab items

Work History

Work History tab allows you to view the work history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work History ListResource Change History
  • Work date/time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, operator name, and path information can be checked
  • To perform detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. SASE Lastmile Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

SASE Lastmile Cancel

If you cancel the unused SASE Lastmile, you can reduce operating costs.

To cancel SASE Lastmile, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > SASE Click the menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the SASE Lastmile menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the SASE Lastmile list page.
  3. SASE Lastmile List Click the resource to be terminated on the page. SASE Lastmile Detail Move to the page.
  4. SASE Lastmile Details on the page SASE Lastmile Delete Click the button.
  5. When termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the SASE Lastmile list.

11.3 - Release Note

SASE

2026.03.19
FEATURE SASE service ledger creation automation
  • The automatic ledger creation feature has been added through the Samsung Cloud Platform user console.
2025.07.01
NEW SASE Service Official Version Release
  • We have launched a SASE service that combines network and security functions into a single cloud-based service platform.

12 - Cloud Last Mile

12.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Cloud Last Mile is a service that provides Last Mile lines for network connection from the customer’s site to the Samsung Cloud Platform region and Customer Edge resources within the customer’s site. Resources installed and operated at the customer’s site can be easily requested through a service request in the Samsung Cloud Platform user console.

Features

  • Provision of Lines and Edge Packages: The Last Mile lines and Edge resources for connecting the customer’s site to external networks are provided in package form by combining optimal equipment suited to the application types the customer primarily uses.
  • Various Edge connection types provided: You can select virtual resources or physical equipment types, and you can choose and use various functions needed for network connections such as routers/SD-WAN/WAN accelerators/Firewall, etc.
  • Last Mile line monitoring service provision: The connection status and traffic usage information of the Last Mile line connected to network equipment within the Samsung Cloud Platform region can be conveniently checked using the monitoring service. The monitoring service is provided using NiO tool, a platform developed in-house by Samsung SDS.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Cloud Last Mile Diagram

Provided Features

Cloud Last Mile service provides the following features.

  • Last Mile line
    • Line provision type: dedicated line or Internet
    • Upper country connection type: Cloud LAN - Data Center, Samsung SDS Data Center On-Premise equipment
  • Customer Edge Resource Provisioning Type
    • uCPE(VNF: Virtual Network Function): router, SD-WAN, WAN accelerator, firewall
    • Physical equipment: SD-WAN
  • Last Mile Line Monitoring Service
    • Last Mile line up/down status and traffic usage monitoring

Constraints

The constraints of the Cloud Last Mile service are as follows.

  • Only the line and Edge equipment package form is provided, so providing the line or equipment alone is not possible.
  • Depending on the upstream country’s connection method, it may be necessary to build customer-dedicated equipment within the Samsung Cloud Platform region.
  • When connecting to the upstream country’s shared equipment, port fees may be charged depending on the associated product.

Region-wise Provision Status

Cloud Last Mile is available in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
South Korea 1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea 3(kr-south3)Not provided
Table. Cloud Last Mile Regional Provision Status

Preceding Service

Cloud Last Mile has no prior service.

12.2 - How-to guides

The user can enter required information for the Cloud Last Mile service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, select detailed options, and create the service.

Cloud Last Mile Create

You can create and use the Cloud Last Mile service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of Cloud Last Mile service, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Cloud Last Mile button. You will be taken to the Create Cloud Last Mile page.

  3. Cloud Last Mile Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.

    • Service Information Input Enter the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Cloud Last Mile nameRequiredCloud Last Mile name to be used by the user
      • Enter using English letters and numbers, 3-20 characters
      Installation AreaRequiredSelect Cloud Last Mile Installation Area
      Installation addressRequiredEnter Cloud Last Mile installation address
      Contract PeriodRequiredSelect Cloud Last Mile Service Contract Period
      Installation Request DateRequiredCloud Last Mile Installation Request Date Selection
      • Select a date at least 2 months after today’s date from the calendar.
      Other requestsOptionEnter request when applying for Cloud Last Mile service
      Table. Cloud Last Mile Service Information Input Items
  4. Check the detailed information generated in the summary panel and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Cloud Last Mile Check detailed information

The Cloud Last Mile service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information in the Cloud Last Mile menu. The Cloud Last Mile Details page consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Task History tabs.

To view detailed information of Cloud Last Mile, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
  2. Click the Cloud Last Mile menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Cloud Last Mile List page.
  3. Click the resource to view detailed information on the Cloud Last Mile List page. It moves to the Cloud Last Mile Details page.
    • Cloud Last Mile Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, Connected Resources, Work History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusCurrent Service Status
      • Request: Service request in progress
      • Creating: Service registration completed
      • Active: Service approved and successfully created
      Service terminationService termination button
      Table. Cloud Last Mile status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Cloud Last Mile.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type(Cloud Last Mile)
SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorService creation request user
Creation TimeService Creation Time
EditorService modification request user
Modification DateTimeService Modification DateTime
Service DetailsService Detail Settings Information
  • Click the edit icon to modify the service detail settings
Table. Cloud Last Mile Detailed Information Tab Items

Connected Resources

You can view the Circuit and Edge information connected to the selected Cloud Last Mile in the Connected Resources tab.

CategoryDetailed description
Circuit and Edge IDCircuit and Edge ID information
  • When ID is clicked, go to the Circuit and Edge detail page
Resource TypeCircuit and Edge Resource Type
Connection TypeCircuit and Edge Connection Type
Resource DetailsCircuit and Edge Resource Detailed Configuration Information
Table. Cloud Last Mile Connected Resources Tab Items

Work History

Work History tab allows you to view the work history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work History ListResource Change History
  • Work date and time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, operator name, path information can be checked
  • To perform detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. Cloud Last Mile Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Cloud Last Mile Cancel

If you cancel the unused Cloud Last Mile, you can reduce operating costs.

Caution
When Circuit and Edge resources are connected, you cannot cancel the Cloud Last Mile service. Please delete the connected Circuit and Edge first.

To cancel Cloud Last Mile, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Go to Cloud Last Mile’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the Cloud Last Mile menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Cloud Last Mile List page.
  3. Cloud Last Mile List page, click the resource to cancel. Move to the Cloud Last Mile Details page.
  4. Click the Service Termination button on the Cloud Last Mile Details page.
  5. When termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Cloud Last Mile list.

12.2.1 - Circuit and Edge

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Circuit and Edge service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Circuit and Edge Creation

You can create and use the Circuit and Edge service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of Circuit and Edge services, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.

  2. Click the Circuit and Edge creation button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Circuit and Edge creation page.

  3. Circuit and Edge Creation Enter the information required to create the service on the page.

    • Service Information Input Enter the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required or not
      Detailed description
      Cloud Last Mile NameRequiredSelect Cloud Last Mile service to use
      • If you click + New Creation, you can create a Cloud Last Mile service and then select it
      Resource TypeRequiredSelect Resource Type to Use
      Resource Type > CircuitRequiredSelect Circuit connection type
      • SD-WAN: Select license to use
      • VPN: Choose line type and enter line bandwidth
        • Enter line bandwidth within 1-1,000
      Resource Type > Customer EdgeRequiredSelect usage type of Customer Edge
      • Physical Equipment: Select manufacturer and performance of the physical equipment to use
      • Virtual Resource: Enter Customer Edge name and select type
        • Select cCPE specification
        • Select Use with up to 3 VNF functions, select manufacturer and performance for each item
      Table. Circuit and Edge Service Information Input Items
  4. Check the detailed information generated in the summary panel, and click the Generate button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Circuit and Edge Detailed Information Check

Circuit and Edge service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the Circuit and Edge menu. The Circuit and Edge Detailed page consists of Detail Information, Work History tabs.

To view detailed information of Circuit and Edge, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
  2. Click the Circuit and Edge menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Circuit and Edge list page.
  3. Circuit and Edge List page, click the resource to view detailed information. Circuit and Edge Details page will be opened.
    • Circuit and Edge Detail page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detail Information, Work History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusCurrent Service Status
      • Request: Service application in progress
      • Creating: Service request completed
      • Active: Service approved and successfully created
      • Deleting: Service termination request in progress
      Previous state changePrevious state change button
      • In Creating, Active, Deleting states, can change to previous state
      Circuit and Edge DeleteService termination button
      Table. Circuit and Edge status information and additional function items

Detailed Information

Detailed Information tab allows you to view detailed information of the selected Circuit and Edge.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type(Circuit and Edge)
SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorService creation request user
Creation TimeService Creation Time
EditorService modification request user
Modification Date/TimeService Modification Date/Time
Service DetailsService Details Settings Information
  • Click the edit icon to modify service detail settings
Table. Circuit and Edge detailed information tab items

Work History

Work History tab allows you to view the work history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work History ListResource Change History
  • Work date and time, resource type, resource name, work details, work result, operator name, path information can be checked
  • To perform detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. Circuit and Edge Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Circuit and Edge Cancel

If you cancel unused Circuit and Edge, you can reduce operating costs.

To cancel Circuit and Edge, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
  2. Click the Circuit and Edge menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Circuit and Edge list page.
  3. Click the resource to be terminated on the Circuit and Edge List page. You will be taken to the Circuit and Edge Details page.
  4. Click the Circuit and Edge Delete button on the Circuit and Edge Details page.
  5. When termination is completed, check the resource termination status in the Circuit and Edge list.

12.3 - Release Note

Cloud Last Mile

2026.03.19
FEATURE Cloud Last Mile Service Ledger Creation Automation
  • Samsung Cloud Platform user console has added automatic ledger creation feature.
2025.07.01
NEW Cloud Last Mile Service Official Version Release
  • We have launched the Cloud Last Mile service that provides Last Mile lines for network connection from the customer’s site to the Samsung Cloud Platform region and Customer Edge resources within the customer’s site.

13 - Global CDN

13.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Global CDN is a service that delivers static content stored in web servers or object storage to users more quickly and securely through numerous edge servers distributed across the global network. When traffic surges, it distributes the load of the origin server to protect the origin server, and by downloading content from adjacent edge servers, it can provide users with fast and stable web services.

Guide
Samsung Cloud Platform’s Global CDN service is provided through the services and infrastructure of the global CDN provider Akamai. Akamai informs that, in accordance with the Information and Communications Network Act, if it receives a list of URLs suspected of containing illegal information from the Broadcasting Media Communications Commission, it may take measures to restrict user access to those URLs.

Features

  • Easy CDN Service Use: You can conveniently apply for Global CDN services through the web-based console of Samsung Cloud Platform. You can easily set the origin server settings of Samsung Cloud Platform and the caching policy settings of Global CDN edge servers, enabling rapid content delivery service usage.
  • Improved Service Availability: Even if many users request content simultaneously, causing excessive traffic, thanks to edge servers distributed across multiple locations, users can access content quickly without degradation of usability. Therefore, when used for tasks that require stable global services, it ensures service availability.
  • Safe content usage: HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP/2 protocols are supported, allowing content integration with various origin servers. If the cached content’s validity period expires or changes to the origin content are confirmed through validation, the edge server’s existing cache is deleted. Then, when a user requests content, the new content from the origin server is cached, so the user always receives valid, up-to-date content.
  • Efficient Cost Management: Even in work environments that require large-scale traffic such as large file downloads, stable service is possible without the need for massive resource usage. Also, Global CDN usage fees are charged only for content usage, allowing efficient cost management.

Service Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Global CDN Diagram

Provided Features

Global CDN provides the following features.

  • Original Settings: Set the location and path of the original server and improve traffic reduction and response speed by providing basic compression of original content.
  • Caching Settings: Set the cached content delivery policy and cache expiration time, and when the content’s validity period expires (TTL expiration), you can delete (Purge) the expired cached content on the edge server.
  • Content Protection: By communicating with the origin server via the HTTPS protocol, the security of the content transmission path is strengthened, and with the powerful security features of the Global CDN network, you can protect content and users from DDoS attacks and web-based attacks.

Components

Connection between the source and the global CDN network

CategoryDescription
Origin location and path settingBased on the main name or IP address, set the origin server’s location, protocol, port number, and file path to connect the origin to the Global CDN network
Forward host headerSet the Host header value to be delivered to the user when requesting the origin server from Global CDN
Cache key hostnameSet cache key information to identify content on Global CDN Edge server
Custom header(request)Custom header usage setting
Table. Connection settings between the original and global CDN network

Caching in Global CDN Network

CategoryDescription
Caching OptionsSetting caching options on the Global CDN network using the origin server’s Cache-control and expiration time
Content Delivery PolicyTransmission policy setting based on validity according to TTL expiration
Cache expiration timeSet expiration time of cached content
Detailed PolicyIgnore query string, Range request, Custom header usage setting
Table. Caching Settings in Global CDN Network

Constraints

The constraints of Global CDN service are as follows.

CategoryDescription
Maximum number of domains that can be created per Account20
Table. Global CDN constraints

Region-specific provision status

Global CDN is available in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
Korea East (kr-east1)Provided
South Korea 1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea 2(kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea 3(kr-south3)Not provided
Table. Global CDN regional provision status

Preliminary Service

Global CDN service has no preceding service.

13.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

Global CDN sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.

Reference
To check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Indicators

The following are the basic metrics for the namespace Global CDN.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
Table. Global CDN Basic Metrics

13.2 - How-to guides

Users can create a Global CDN service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a Global CDN

You can create and use a Global CDN service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
To use the Global CDN service, you must add allow rules to the Firewall and Security Group for the origin server.

To request the creation of a Global CDN service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Global CDN button. You will be redirected to the Create Global CDN page.
  3. On the Create Global CDN page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      CDN NameRequiredEnter the Global CDN name to use
      • Cannot be used the same as a name already in use
      CDN DomainRequiredEnter the domain name of the Global CDN to use
      Table. Global CDN service information input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Origin Settings section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      Origin Location > Domain or IPRequiredEnter the location of the origin server
      • Enter domain name (recommended) or directly enter the public IP of the origin server
      Origin Location > ProtocolRequiredSelect the protocol to use
      • Service protocol and origin protocol must be set the same
      Origin Location > Port NumberRequiredEnter 1 origin port to use
      • Allowed origin ports: 72, 80-89, 443, 488, 591, 777, 1080, 1088, 1111, 1443, 2080, 7001, 7070, 7612, 7777, 8000-9001, 9090, 9901-9908, 11080-11110, 12900-12949, 45002
      Origin PathOptionalEnter the directory path of the origin file
      • Example: /aaa/bbb/ccc/
      Forward host headerRequiredSet the Host header value to be delivered to the user when Global CDN requests the origin server
      • Incoming host header: Service domain name
      • Origin host name: Origin domain name
      • Custom Value: Directly enter the domain name in standard domain format such as www.abc.com
      Cache key hostnameRequiredSet cache key information to identify content from the Global CDN Edge server
      • Incoming host header: Use the domain the user accesses as the cache key
      • Origin hostname: Use the configured origin domain as the cache key
      Custom header (request)OptionalChange specific Header when requesting from Global CDN Edge server to origin server
      • When selecting Use, enter Header name and Header value
      • Add items with (+) button, delete with (X) button
      • Can enter up to 10
      Table. Global CDN origin settings input items
      Note
      • You can apply for multiple Global CDN services in one Account.
      • Only one origin location can be set in the Global CDN service.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Cache Settings section. This determines how to handle Cache headers transmitted to the Global CDN Edge server.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      Cache OptionRequiredSet the caching policy applied to all content transmitted to the Global CDN Edge server (Honor origin cache-control and expires recommended)
      • Honor origin cache-control and expires: Follow all origin’s cache-control and expiration policies
      • Cache: Follow the Global CDN provider’s policy
      • Honor origin expires: Follow the origin’s expiration time policy
      • Honor origin cache-control: Follow the origin server’s cache control policy
      Content Delivery PolicyRequiredValidate content validity with origin server from Global CDN Edge server
      • Provide only valid content: Set not to send when TTL expires (recommended)
      • Provide all cached content: Provide all cached content regardless of TTL expiration
      Cache Expiration TimeRequiredEnter the time when cached content expires in the Global CDN Edge
      • Enter within 3,600 – 2,592,000 seconds
      Ignore query stringOptionalSet whether to use query string when applying caching policy
      • When setting Use, ignore query string
      Allow Range requestOptionalProvide large file optimization function for objects over 100 MB
      • When setting Use, support optimization up to 1.8 GB
      Custom header (response)OptionalChange specific Header when requesting from Global CDN Edge server to origin server
      • When setting Use, enter Header name and Header value
      • Add items with (+) button, delete with (X) button
      • Can enter up to 10
      Table. Global CDN cache settings input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select the Key, Value values
      Table. Global CDN additional information input items
  4. Review the application details and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Global CDN List page.

Checking Global CDN Detailed Information

For the Global CDN service, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The Global CDN Details page consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History.

To check Global CDN detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN List page.
  3. On the Global CDN List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Details page.
    • The Global CDN Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the Global CDN, and consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History.
      DivisionDescription
      Service StatusStatus of the Global CDN
      • Creating: Creating/When starting Global CND
      • Active: Creation complete/Operating, information can be modified
      • Inactive/Pending: Stopped
      • Aborted: Failed to activate after creating Property
      • Stopped/stopping: Stopped/Stopping
      • Editing: Changing settings
      • Starting: Starting
      • Deleting: Terminating
      • Mismatching: When Console and Global CDN partner versions are different
      • Error: Error occurred
      StartService start button
      StopService stop button
      Apply PurgeApply Purger function button
      Terminate ServiceButton to terminate Global CDN
      Table. Global CDN status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Global CDN List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
CDN NameCDN name
CDN DomainCDN domain information
CDN Configuration VersionConfiguration (Property) information applied to the Global CDN service
  • When Property version and active version checked from Global CDN partner are different, cannot control from Console
  • When activating the version checked from Console, all functions can be used
DescriptionAdditional description entered by the user
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
Origin SettingsEntered CDN origin information
  • Can check origin location, protocol, Port number, origin path, Forward host header, Cache key hostname, Custom header(request) details
Cache SettingsEntered CDN description
  • Can check cache option, content delivery policy, Cache expiration time, Ignore query string, Allow Range request, Custom header(response) details
Table. Global CDN detailed information tab items

Tags

On the Global CDN List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • You can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Global CDN tag tab items

Operation History

On the Global CDN List page, you can check the operation history of the selected resource.

DivisionDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • You can check operation details, operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation result, operator information
  • Click the corresponding resource in the Operation History List to open the Operation History Details popup window
Table. Global CDN operation history tab items

Changing Global CDN Settings

You can change and apply Global CDN service settings.

To change Global CDN settings, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN List page.
  3. On the Global CDN List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Details page.
  4. On the Global CDN Details page, click the Edit button. You will be redirected to the Edit Global CDN page.
  5. On the Edit Global CDN page, modify the desired information and click Complete. The modification notification window will open.
  6. Click Confirm in the notification window. The service information modification is complete.

Controlling Global CDN Operation

You can stop or re-run the Global CDN service.

To control the operation of Global CDN, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN List page.
  3. On the Global CDN List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Details page.
  4. On the Global CDN Details page, click the control button. This controls the service operation.
    • Start: Runs the Global CDN service.
    • Stop: Stops the Global CDN service operation.
Caution
  • When starting or stopping the service, it takes more than 1 hour to apply worldwide.
  • When stopping the service, service domain provision is stopped. Please be careful when using the service stop function.

Applying Global CDN Purge

Purge is a function that forcibly deletes content cached in the CDN Edge server. When content is modified before the object expires, you can delete the existing content from the CDN Edge through Purge and set it to update with new content.

Caution
  • When applying Purge, all content stored in the CDN Edge is deleted, and content requests to the origin may occur simultaneously from the CDN Edge.
  • When running Purge, requests to the origin server increase and load may occur. Please be careful when applying Purge.

To apply Purge to Global CDN, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN List page.
  3. On the Global CDN List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Details page.
  4. On the Global CDN Details page, click the Apply Purge button. The Purge application window will open.
  5. Set detailed items in the Purge application window and click Confirm. The modification notification window will open.
    • Select Content: Select the content type to apply Purge to.
    • Enter Path Information: When selecting Entire Domain, the set domain information is displayed, and when selecting Enter Path, you can directly enter the path excluding the domain.
  6. Click Confirm in the notification window. Purge is applied.

Terminating Global CDN

You can apply for the termination of the Global CDN service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
Global CDN can only be terminated in the stopped state. To terminate the product, first click the Stop button to change the status.

To request the termination of the Global CDN service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be redirected to the Global CDN List page.
  3. On the Global CDN List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the Global CDN Details page.
  4. On the Global CDN Details page, click the Terminate Service button.
  5. When termination is complete, check the service termination status on the Global CDN list.

13.3 - API Reference

API Reference

13.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

13.5 - Release Note

Global CDN

2026.03.19
FEATURE Global CDN feature improvement
  • You can check measurement values for the following 2 items in conjunction with the Service Watch service.
    • Check Global CDN status
    • Check Global CDN processed data volume
      • Data from 30 minutes ago is retrieved due to external CDN network traffic processing time.
2025.07.01
NEW Global CDN service official version release
  • We have released the Global CDN service, which transmits static content stored on web servers or object storage to users faster and more securely through edge servers distributed across the global network.

14 - GSLB

14.1 - Overview

Service Overview

GSLB (Global Server Load Balancing) automatically distributes network traffic to available adjacent regions on a DNS basis when traffic increases in a specific global region. In case of failure on a specific server, it load balances network traffic to available new resources, allowing the service to continue stably.

Features

  • Stable Service Provision: Through the function to check whether connected resources are operating normally (Health Check), if a failure occurs on a specific server, it immediately performs a Failover on that resource and removes it from the domain response, thereby bypassing traffic to other resources to provide stable service.
  • Easy Service Port Configuration: You can conveniently create GSLB through a web-based console and set/manage service ports. For L4-level load balancing, multi-port configuration is possible (80, 443, 8080-8090, etc.), and multiple load balancing rules can be applied and managed simultaneously.
  • Efficient Cost Management: Charges are determined by applying a detailed billing method based on the number of configured domains, the number of added Health Check resources, and the number of queries, allowing efficient cost management.

Service Configuration Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. GSLB Configuration Diagram

Provided Functions

The GSLB service provides the following functions.

  • GSLB Creation/Management: You can register multiple resources to a single GSLB.
  • Distribution Algorithm Selection: Provides the Ratio method, which distributes traffic in proportion to the weight (Weight) for each connection target, and the Round Robin method, which distributes traffic evenly while circulating.
  • Health Check Configuration: You can set the check cycle (Interval), service down recognition time (Timeout), response wait time (Probe Timeout), protocol (ICMP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS), and service port.

Constraints

The constraints of the GSLB service are as follows.

ItemDescription
Maximum number of domains that can be created per Account20
Maximum number of resources that can be connected per domain8
Table. GSLB Constraints
Note
  • For GSLB to monitor connection targets, allow rules must be added to the Firewall and Security Group of the connection target resources.

Regional Availability

The GSLB service can be provided in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Korea West (kr-west1)Available
Korea East (kr-east1)Available
Korea South1 (kr-south1)Unavailable
Korea South2 (kr-south2)Unavailable
Korea South3 (kr-south3)Unavailable
Table. GSLB Regional Availability

Prerequisite Services

The GSLB service has no prerequisite services.

14.2 - How-to guides

Users can create a GSLB service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a GSLB

You can create and use a GSLB service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a GSLB service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create GSLB button. You will be redirected to the Create GSLB page.
  3. On the Create GSLB page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      PurposeRequiredPUBLIC automatically entered when creating GSLB
      Domain NameRequiredEnter the GSLB domain name to use
      • Enter within 4-40 characters using lowercase English letters and numbers
      • Cannot be used the same as a name already in use
      Add Connection Target > IPRequiredEnter the connection target IP address
      Add Connection Target > LocationRequiredSelect the location to perform monitoring for the connection target
      • Recommended to specify a location close to the IP server
      Add Connection Target > DescriptionOptionalEnter additional information or description for the connection target
      Add Connection Target > Connection Target ListRequiredDisplay the added connection target IP, location, description items
      • After entering connection target IP, location, description, click the Add button to add the item
      • Up to 8 connection targets can be added to one GSLB service
      • Click x to delete the item from the list, or click the Delete All button to delete all items in the list
      Table. GSLB service information input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Connection Target Monitoring Settings section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      Health CheckRequiredSelect the protocol type to perform health check
      • Can select from ICMP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS (use of HTTPS recommended for security)
      IntervalRequiredEnter the time interval (seconds) to perform health check
      TimeoutRequiredEnter the waiting time (seconds) to determine the server status (UP or DOWN) during health check
      Probe TimeoutRequiredEnter the response waiting time (seconds)
      • Enter domain name (recommended) or directly enter the public IP of the origin server
      Service PortRequiredWhen using TCP/HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the port to use for health check
      • Enter domain name (recommended) or directly enter the public IP of the origin server
      User NameOptionalWhen using HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the user name to use when authentication is required for health check communication
      PasswordOptionalWhen using HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the password to use when authentication is required for health check communication
      • Enter within 8-20 characters including all English letters, numbers, and special characters (@$!%*#?&)
      Send StringOptionalWhen using HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the string to send when checking a specific web page
      • Example) GET /www/example/index.html
      • For HTTP 1.0/1.1, enter line break as /r/n, special characters (<, >, #) cannot be used in the string
      Receive StringRequiredWhen using HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the string to receive as health check response
      • Enter only English uppercase/lowercase letters and numbers in the string
      Table. GSLB connection target monitoring settings input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Load Balancing Policy Settings section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      AlgorithmRequiredSelect the load balancing method
      • Ratio: Distribute traffic proportionally to the weight (Weight) of each connection target
      • Round robin: Distribute traffic equally based on round-robin method
      Connection TargetRequiredWhen selecting Ratio, enter Weight for each connection target
      • Weight is the weight applied to the connection target when distributing service requests, enter within 0 - 100
      • Click the detailed view icon in the description item to check connection target information
      Table. GSLB load balancing policy input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information section.
      Division
      Required
      Description
      DescriptionOptionalEnter additional information or description for the GSLB service
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select the Key, Value values
      Table. GSLB additional information input items
  4. Review the creation details and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the GSLB List page.
Note
To monitor connection targets, GSLB must add allow rules to the Firewall and Security Group.

Checking GSLB Detailed Information

For the GSLB service, you can view and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The GSLB Details page consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Connection Targets, Tags, Operation History.

To check GSLB detailed information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB List page.
  3. On the GSLB List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the GSLB Details page.
    • The GSLB Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the GSLB, and consists of tabs for Detailed Information, Connection Targets, Tags, Operation History.
      DivisionDescription
      Service StatusStatus of the GSLB
      • Creating: Creating
      • Active: Operating
      • Editing: Modifying
      • Deleting: Terminating
      • Error: Error occurred
      Terminate ServiceButton to terminate GSLB
      Table. GSLB status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the GSLB List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDescription
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
Domain NameGSLB domain information
PurposeGSLB purpose
AlgorithmSet GSLB algorithm information
  • Click the Edit icon to change settings
Health CheckSet GSLB health check information
  • Click the Edit icon to change settings
DescriptionEntered GSLB description
  • Click the Edit icon to modify description
Table. GSLB detailed information tab items

Connection Targets

On the GSLB List page, you can check the connection target information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

DivisionDescription
IPConnection target IP address
Resource IDGSLB resource ID
LocationLocation to perform monitoring for the connection target
DescriptionEnter additional information or description for the connection target
  • Click the detailed view icon to check information
Use StatusDisplay whether the connection target is in use
WeightDisplay the connection target’s Weight
Connection StatusDisplay connection status
  • Connected: Normal connection status
  • Disconnected: Disconnected status
Modify Connection TargetAdd connection target and modify information
Table. GSLB connection target tab items

Tags

On the GSLB List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource, and add, change, or delete tags.

DivisionDescription
Tag ListTag list
  • You can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. GSLB tag tab items

Operation History

On the GSLB List page, you can check the operation history of the selected resource.

DivisionDescription
Operation History ListResource change history
  • You can check operation details, operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation result, operator information
  • Click the corresponding resource in the Operation History List to open the Operation History Details popup window
Table. GSLB operation history tab items

Modifying Connection Target Information

You can add, modify, or delete GSLB connection target information.

To change GSLB connection target information, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB List page.
  3. On the GSLB List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the GSLB Details page.
  4. On the GSLB Details page, click the Connection Targets tab. You will be redirected to the Connection Targets tab page.
  5. On the Connection Targets tab page, click the Modify Connection Target button. You will be redirected to the Modify Connection Target page.
  6. On the Modify Connection Target page, modify the desired information.
    • Add: Enter connection target IP, select location, enter description, and click the Add button to add the item.
    • Delete: Click the Delete button to delete the connection target item.
    • You can modify Weight for each item in the connection target list.
  7. When modification is complete, click Complete. The modification notification window will open.
  8. Click Confirm in the notification window. The service information modification is complete.
Note
  • You can add up to 8 connection targets to one GSLB service.
  • When adding a connection target, it is recommended to set it to a location close to the connection target server in the location item.

Setting Up Regional Routing Controller

You can check the Regional Routing Controller and change the use status.

To change the use status of Regional Routing Controller, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Regional Routing Controller menu. You will be redirected to the Regional Routing Controller List page.

  3. On the Regional Routing Controller List page, search for the resource for which you want to check detailed information.

    • Click the Detailed Search button to search by selecting domain, connection location, and use status.
  4. On the Regional Routing Controller List page, check the resource information and change the use status.

    DivisionDescription
    Domain NameRegistered domain name
    • Click the domain name to move to the GSLB Details > Connection Targets tab page
    PurposeDomain purpose
    Connection LocationLocation to perform monitoring for the connection target
    Connection Targets by LocationNumber of connection targets by location
    Use StatusDisplay connection target use setting status, click the more button to change use status
    • Use: Set connection target to use
    • Stop: Stop connection target use
    • You can also set use by selecting the domain in the list and selecting Use or Stop at the top
    Table. Regional Routing Controller list

  5. Click Confirm in the notification window. The domain use status change is complete.

Terminating GSLB

You can apply for the termination of the GSLB service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the termination of the GSLB service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. You will be redirected to the GSLB List page.
  3. On the GSLB List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be redirected to the GSLB Details page.
  4. On the GSLB Details page, click the Terminate Service button.
  5. When termination is complete, check the service termination status on the GSLB list.

14.3 - API Reference

API Reference

14.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

14.5 - Release Note

GSLB

2025.12.16
FEATURE Regional Routing Controller Service Added
  • You can control whether to use traffic to be connected through GSLB by region.
2025.07.01
NEW GSLB Service Official Version Released
  • We have released the GSLB service that can automatically distribute network traffic to adjacent regions on a DNS basis when traffic increases in a specific global region, providing stable service.

15 - Cloud Virtual Circuit

Global Samsung Cloud Platform provides a 1:1 virtual circuit service based on the line bandwidth between regions or customer bases.

15.1 - Overview

Service Overview

becomes Cloud Virtual Circuit service is a service that provides a 1:1 virtual circuit based on circuit bandwidth between global Samsung Cloud Platform regions or customer bases.

Key Features

Cloud Virtual Circuit provides the following functions and features.

  • Mesh-type one-to-one connection: The Samsung Cloud Platform infrastructure is connected between all global regions, so you can use one-to-one virtual circuit services from anywhere to anywhere.
  • Non-contract short-term line service: Unlike existing network line services, it provides a non-contract rate system, allowing for cost-effective use when short-term line service is needed.
  • Special feature provision: It provides a special feature that can divide a single virtual circuit into multiple logical circuits for different purposes and use them.

Service Composition Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Cloud Virtual Circuit configuration diagram

Provided Function

Cloud Virtual Circuit service provides the following functions.

  • Korean and global service provision
  • Korea: Suwon, Sangam, Chuncheon, Gumi, Nonhyeon
  • Global: New Jersey, San Jose, Sao Paulo, London, Frankfurt, Hong Kong, Singapore, Delhi, Dubai, Tokyo
  • Global region-to-region one-to-one virtual circuit service (based on L2VPN) provided
  • You can select departure and destination access locations in all service areas.
  • A single cloud virtual circuit consists of up to two virtual links for redundancy.
  • Provided circuit bandwidth: * 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 Mbps * 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 Gbps
Reference
The maximum circuit bandwidth within the country is 10 Gbps, and the maximum circuit bandwidth between Korea-Global and Global-Global is 1 Gbps.
  • Logical circuit separation function (Multi VLAN): Up to 5 individual VLANs can be used with a single cloud virtual circuit.

Components

Cloud Virtual Circuit provides a 1:1 virtual backbone line between global bases. The components are as follows, and you can create resources with related self-service through the user Console.

DivisionContent
Cloud Virtual Circuitvirtual resource that accommodates up to two Virtual Links for the same 1:1 point
Starting Point Access Location1:1 virtual circuit starting point Access Location information
Destination Access Location1:1 virtual circuit’s destination Access Location information
Multi VLANa function that separates one Virtual Link into multiple logical lines and provides them
Virtual LinkCloud Virtual Circuit with virtual circuit based on dedicated line bandwidth (line bandwidth, contract period, transmission path level option selection)
CE equipmentnetwork equipment that receives a dedicated line for the customer’s business site (Customer Edge)
Fig. Cloud Virtual Circuit Components

Limitations

Cloud Virtual Circuit has the following restrictions.

  • For one Cloud Virtual Circuit, you can create up to 2 Virtual Links.
  • Multi VLAN feature can create up to 5 per one Cloud Virtual Circuit.

Regional provision status

Cloud Virtual Circuit service is available in the following environment.

RegionAvailability
Korea West 1(kr-west1)Provided
Korea East 1 (kr-east1)Not Provided
South Korea 1(kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea 2(kr-south2)Not provided
Korea South 3(kr-south3)Not Provided
Table. Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Availability by Region

Preceding service

There are no services that must be pre-configured before creating this service.

15.2 - How-to guides

The user can apply for the Cloud Virtual Circuit service through the service request of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Cloud Virtual Circuit application

You can apply for Cloud Virtual Circuit through the Support Center of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To apply for Cloud Virtual Circuit, follow the following procedure.

  1. All services > Networking > Cloud Virtual Circuit menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of Cloud Virtual Circuit.

  2. Service Home page, click the Cloud Virtual Circuit service request button. It moves to the Service Request page of the Support Center.

  3. Cloud Virtual Circuit application requires information to be selected and entered.

    Classification
    Necessity
    Detailed Description
    titlerequiredtitle for service request
    • use Hangul, English, numbers, special characters (+=,.@-_) to enter within 64 characters
    RegionRequiredSelect the region to request the service
    ServiceRequiredNetworking service group’s Cloud Virtual Circuit service selection
    job classificationrequiredCloud Virtual Circuit new application selection
    ContentRequiredInformation input for Cloud Virtual Circuit application
    Table. Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Request Items

  4. Check the input information and click the request button.

Guidance
  • After requesting the service, you cannot modify or delete the written content.
  • After requesting a service, you can check the details of the request on the Service Request List page of the Support Center. Please refer to Checking Service Request Details for more information.

Cloud Virtual Circuit cancellation

You can request to cancel the Cloud Virtual Circuit in the Support Center of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To apply for Cloud Virtual Circuit, follow the following procedure.

  1. All services > Management > Support Center menu should be clicked. It moves to the Service Home page.

  2. Service Home page, click the Cloud Virtual Circuit service request menu. It moves to the service request page.

  3. Cloud Virtual Circuit cancellation requires information to be selected and entered.

    Classification
    Necessity
    Detailed Description
    titlerequiredtitle for service request
    • use hangul, english, numbers, special characters (+=,.@-_) to input within 64 characters
    RegionRequiredSelect the region to request service cancellation
    ServiceRequiredNetworking service group’s Cloud Virtual Circuit service selection
    job classificationrequiredCloud Virtual Circuit cancellation application optional
    ContentRequiredInformation input for Cloud Virtual Circuit cancellation application
    Table. Cloud Virtual Circuit service cancellation request items

  4. Check the input information and click the request button.

Guidance
  • After requesting the service, you cannot modify or delete the written content.
  • After requesting a service, you can check the details of the request on the Service Request List page in the Support Center. Please refer to Checking Service Request Details for more information.

15.3 - Release Note

Cloud Virtual Circuit

2025.09.08
NEW Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Official Version Release
  • Cloud Virtual Circuit service has been officially launched.
  • The user can apply for a 1:1 virtual circuit based on the line bandwidth between the Global Samsung Cloud Platform region or the customer’s hub.

16 - Private 5G Cloud

16.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Private 5G Cloud is a service based on the Samsung Cloud Platform that provides Private 5G Core, Edge solutions for enterprise customers. By utilizing the cloud, it minimizes the construction of physical 5G network equipment, allowing for the creation of a flexible and expandable network environment optimized for the customer’s private environment, and easily connecting multiple geographically dispersed locations.

It provides an enterprise-dedicated 5G Core in a cloud environment, guarantees service availability with stable operation, and enables real-time processing of large amounts of data within the enterprise and secure protection of important data through Edge solutions.

Features

  • Stable Operation: Private 5G Cloud provides a combination of verified 5G Core quality and stability, and cloud security policies. Additionally, it offers 24-hour monitoring services by 5G professional operation personnel. This enables regular system diagnostics and prompt action in case of failures, allowing for stable service operation.
  • Efficient cost management: By configuring a Private 5G network on the Samsung Cloud Platform, you can reduce the initial investment cost for building a 5G system and minimize operating costs. Fast and secure cloud-based Private 5G network configuration is possible, as well as flexible operation and capacity expansion.
  • Private Edge solution provision: Provides application management and Edge Computing services based on Kubernetes applying 3GPP MEC standards. It configures the Edge Computing service environment within the customer’s company, enabling ultra-low latency data transmission, and since all data and services are located within the customer’s company, it can safely protect the company’s valuable information.
  • Various linkage functions: Various solutions and software verified in Private 5G Open Lab can be used in the marketplace. Customers can introduce new technologies such as AI, machine learning, and big data by utilizing already configured development environments and related ecosystems, and customized solution use is possible.

Service Composition Diagram

Configuration Diagram
Figure. Private 5G Cloud Configuration Diagram

Provided Function

Private 5G Cloud provides the following functions.

  • Private 5G Cloud Core: cloud-based 5G wireless network and authentication service provision
  • Private 5G Core CP: cloud area where customer-specific 5G signal control processing
  • UPF: handling data of unique services for each customer in the customer’s business area
  • 5G Network: Cloud and customer premises dedicated network service processing between customers (VPN/Dedicated Line)

Components

Private 5G Cloud provides services across the entire 5G network within the customer’s business site, and the components are as follows.

5G Core network

  • User authentication, session management, data processing
  • Customer terminal registration/deletion/modification/management

Service Portal

  • 5G integrated service portal provision
  • User Portal: User Policy Creation/Change/Management
  • Administrator Portal: Authentication Policy Management and Monitoring

Network Solution

VPN, dedicated lines, etc. cloud network solution configuration

Regional Provision Status

Private 5G Cloud can be provided in the following environments.

RegionAvailability
Korea West 1(kr-west1)Provided
Korean East 1 (kr-east1)provided
South Korea 1(kr-south1)Provided
South Korea 2(kr-south2)Provided
South Korea South 3provided
Table. Private 5G Cloud Provision Status by Region

Preceding service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance for more detailed information.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
ComputeVirtual Servervirtual server optimized for cloud computing
NetworkingVPCa service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity Groupa virtual firewall that controls the server’s traffic
NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer network and Samsung Cloud Platform
NetworkingFirewallA service that provides a firewall for traffic connecting VPC and the internet, customer network
NetworkingVPNA service that connects the customer network and Samsung Cloud Platform through an encrypted virtual private network
  • Connect regions and customer sites with IP Sec. tunneling on the internet to provide security services
Table. Private 5G Cloud Preceding Service

16.2 - How-to guides

The user can enter the essential information of the Private 5G Cloud service and select detailed options to create the service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Private 5G Cloud creation

You can create and use the Private 5G Cloud service on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Private 5G Cloud, follow the next procedure.

  1. All services > Networking > Private 5G Cloud menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of Private 5G Cloud.
  2. Service Home page, click the Private 5G Cloud service request button. It moves to the service request page.
  3. Service Request page, select or enter the essential information for Private 5G Cloud.
    Notice
    In the job classification, select and create Private 5G Cloud service creation.
Input ItemDetailed Description
TitleTitle of the service you want to request
RegionLocation selection of Samsung Cloud Platform
  • Automatically entered as the region of the project
ServiceSelect the service group and service of the corresponding service
  • Service Group: Networking
  • Service: Private 5G Cloud
Task classificationSelect the task you want to perform
  • Private 5G Cloud service creation: Select if you want to create this service
ContentPrivate 5G Cloud creation requires detailed information input
[Basic Information]
  • Account Name: Enter account name
  • Customer Name/Affiliated Company/Department/E-mail/Phone Number: Enter user information
  • Service Start Date: Enter the desired service start date

[Application Information]
  • Usage Purpose: Enter the purpose of using Private 5G Cloud
    • Example: Manufacturing, Logistics, Robot, CCTV, Video Analysis
  • Usage Period (Default 3 years): Enter the service usage period
AttachmentOnly upload when you have additional files to share
  • Attached files can be up to 5 files, each within 5MB
  • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. Detailed contents of private 5G cloud service creation request items
  1. Check the entered creation information, and click the request button.
  • Once creation is complete, check the Service Request List page to see if the resource has been created.
  • This creation work proceeds with procedures such as purchasing physical servers, delivery, configuration work, and site construction, and takes at least 8 weeks or more based on business days.

Private 5G Cloud application history check

You can check the application and cancellation details of the Private 5G Cloud service on the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Reference

Private 5G Cloud’s service application and cancellation request details can be checked through the following procedure.

To check the application history of Private 5G Cloud service, follow the next procedure.

  1. All services > Management > Support Center menu, click. Support Center > Service Home page will be moved.
  2. Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. It moves to the Service Request List page.
  3. Service Request List page, click the title of the service request you applied for. It moves to the Service Request Details page.
  4. Service Request Details page where you can check the application status and information.
Notice
When a service request is received, the sales/operations manager checks the service application details and proceeds with the Private 5G Cloud service based on the entered information.

Private 5G Cloud Cancellation

You can cancel the Private 5G Cloud service whose contract period has expired to reduce operating costs.

Reference
  • If the service is canceled, the service in operation may be stopped immediately, so the cancellation work must be proceeded after fully considering the impact that occurs when the service is stopped.
  • To apply for service cancellation before the contract period expires, the user’s contract manager and SamsungSDS contract manager must complete the cancellation of the corresponding Private 5G Cloud contract through prior consultation before cancellation, and then proceed with the cancellation according to the following procedure.

To cancel Private 5G Cloud, follow the following procedure.

  1. All services > Networking > Private 5G Cloud menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of Private 5G Cloud.
  2. Service Home page, click the Private 5G Cloud service request button. It moves to the service request page.
  3. Service Request page, select or enter the required information for Private 5G Cloud.
    Notice
    In the job classification, select Private 5G Cloud service cancellation to cancel.
Input ItemDetailed Description
titletitle of the service you want to request
RegionLocation selection of Samsung Cloud Platform
  • Automatically entered as the region of the project
ServiceSelect the service group and service for the corresponding service
  • Service group: Networking
  • Service: Private 5G Cloud
Task ClassificationSelect the task you want to perform
  • Private 5G Cloud service cancellation: Select if you want to cancel the service
ContentPrivate 5G Cloud cancellation requires detailed information input
[Basic Information]
  • Account Name: Enter account name
  • Customer Name/Company/Department/E-mail/Phone Number: Enter user information
  • Desired Cancellation Date: Enter the desired service cancellation date
Attachment fileOnly upload when you have a file you want to share additionally
  • Attached files can be attached up to 5 files with a maximum of 5MB each
  • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. Private 5G Cloud service cancellation request item detailed content
  1. Check the entered creation information, and click the request button.
  • When the cancellation is complete, Service Request List page should be checked to see if the resource has been cancelled.
  • The cancellation process is completed after returning the physical server, so it takes at least 3-4 weeks based on business days.

16.3 - Release Note

Private 5G Cloud

2025.09.08
NEW Private 5G Cloud Service Release
  • A Private 5G Cloud product that provides 5G services to customers based on the Samsung Cloud Platform has been launched.